Stirred Reactors and Pressure Vessels

P a r r
I n s t r u m e n t
C o m p a n y
Stirred Reactors and
Pressure Vessels
Bulletin 4500 | Volume 14
Designing
and Building
Quality
Pressure
Apparatus
for Over
100 Years
Founded in 1899
by University of Illinois
Professor S.W. Parr,
Parr Instrument Company
has consistently strived
to provide for its customers
the very best in product,
service and support.
Welcome to the Fourteenth Edition of the Parr Stirred
Reactor and Pressure Vessel Catalog. We proudly
present here our latest catalog describing the continued
expansion of this product line. New products, new
designs, and expanded options are offered; all backed
by Parr’s continuing dedication to product quality,
safety, and customer satisfaction. We hope you will
find this new catalog to be a useful tool.
Parr Instrument Company
211 Fifty-third Street
Moline, Illinois 61265 USA
Phone: 309/762-7716
800/872-7720
Fax:
309/762-9453
Email: parr@parrinst.com
web: www.parrinst.com
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
1
Table of Contents
The User’s Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Chapter Four:
Tubular Reactors
75
Solid Charging Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Chapter One: Design Features
7
Series 5400 Continuous Flow
Tubular Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cooling Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Design Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fluidized Bed Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Sample Collection Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Chapter Five:
Specialty and Custom
Reactor Systems
Bottom Drain Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
New Products and Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Design Codes and Certification . . . . . . . . . . 9
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Pressure and Temperature Limits . . . . . . . 13
High Torque Magnetic Drives . . . . . . . . . . 14
Split Ring Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Gaskets and Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Mounting Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Liquid Charging Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Valves and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
85
Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Introduction to Specialty Custom
Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Pressure Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Biofuels and Alternative Fuels
Research Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Horizontal Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Supercritical Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Chapter Two:
Stirred Reactors
23
GTO (Gas-To-Oil) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reactor Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Apparatus for Vapor Pressure
Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
How to use Ordering Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Disbonding Apparatus for ASTM G146 . . . 92
Series 4520 1-2 L Bench Top Reactors . . . 28
Apparatus for Corrosion Studies . . . . . . . . 92
Series 4530 1-2 L Floor Stand Reactors. . . 32
Chapter Six:
Controllers
Series 4540 600-1200 mL HP Reactors . . . 36
Series 4550 1-2 Gallon Reactors . . . . . . . . 40
Series 4555 2.6-5 Gallon Floor
Stand Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Series 4560 Mini Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Series 4570-4580 HT/HP Reactors . . . . . . . 52
Series 4590 Micro Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Series 5100 Glass Reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Series 5500 HP Compact Reactors . . . . . . . 64
Cylinder Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Insulated Electrical Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Temperature Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Spare Parts Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
External Valves and Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Chapter Eight:
Non-Stirred Vessels
131
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
93
Series 4703-4714 22-45 mL Vessels . . . . . 134
Controller Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Series 4740 25-75 mL HP/HT Vessels . . . 136
Series 4848 Reactor Controllers . . . . . . . . . 96
Series 4750 125-200 mL Vessels . . . . . . . 138
Series 4838 Temperature Controller . . . . . 99
Series 4790 25-100 mL HP/HT Vessels . . 140
SpecView Software for 4848 &
4838 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Series 4760-4777 100-600 mL Vessels . . . 144
Series 4871 Process Controllers. . . . . . . . 101
Series 4875 Power Controller . . . . . . . . . . 105
Series 4876 Power Controllers . . . . . . . . . 105
Series 4760-4768 300-600 mL
HT Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Series 4600-4620 1-2 L GP &
HP Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
4877 Valve Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Series 4605-4626 600-1200 mL
HP Vessels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
67
A2110E Motor Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Series 4650 250-1000 mL HP Vessels . . . 154
Series 5000 Multiple Reactor
System (MRS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
A2200E Mass Flow Controller . . . . . . . . . 106
Series 4660 1-2 Gallon Vessels . . . . . . . . 156
Chapter Seven:
Optional Fittings
Series 4680 1-1.8 L HP/HT Vessels . . . . . . 158
Chapter Three:
Multiple Reactors
Combinatorial Chemistry and
High-Throughput Screening . . . . . . . . . . 72
107
Series 4670 1-1.5 Gal. HP/HT Vessels . . . 160
Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Series 4676-4679 2.6-5 Gal. Vessels. . . . . 162
Stirring Motors and Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Gage Block Assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Stirrer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Coned Pressure Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Gas Entrainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Catalyst Baskets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Condensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Safety Rupture Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Pressure Relief Valves and Gages . . . . . . 117
Gas Measurement Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 118
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
1
This catalog is only the beginning...
What we cannot easily show in this catalog
is as important to you as what we have
shown. We refer here to the long-established
practices and policies of Parr Instrument
Company that have helped to build our
reputation as a reliable supplier in our
specialized field, such as:
Support
A technical sales and support staff with
an average of over 20 years of experience in this
specialized field. We have “been there and done
that” and we are looking forward to helping you
solve your unique requirements.
www.parrinst.com is continually updated to
provide you with 24 hours access to a more extensive discussion of our products and capabilities.
Look for our online resources to expand as we
strive to continue to provide you with the world
class experience you have come to expect from
Parr Instrument Company.
Communication
A commitment to listen to our customers
and a willingness to make the additions or changes
in a reactor or pressure vessel that the customer may
want or need. Approximately 40 percent of all the
reactors and vessels we ship are modified in some
way over-and-above the options listed in this catalog.
Special valves, special head layouts, electrical leads,
special stands, additional openings, unique motors,
and non-standard materials of construction are just a
few of the modifications we work with every day.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
2
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
1
Service
A commitment to maintain commonly
used replacement and service parts in stock
for same day shipment.
Investment
An investment in modern machine
tools and superior production management methods enables us to make available
not only all of the options listed on the following pages, but also to handle custom orders
for one-of-a-kind designs along with regular
production orders on a routine basis.
Research
A commitment to new materials, manufacturing
methods, research disciplines, and computer advances
to continue our leadership position.
Delivery
A commitment to prompt and dependable delivery
schedules for not only catalog items, but also for custom
equipment as well. Typical delivery time for catalog reactors
constructed of stainless steel is five to seven weeks. For special
alloys and custom modifications, plan for seven to nine weeks
for delivery. For systems or orders requiring extensive custom
design work allow at least eight to twelve weeks. Of equal
importance over the life of your reactor is our commitment to
maintain commonly used replacement and service parts in stock
for same day shipment.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
3
New Products & Designs
At Parr Instrument Company, we never rest
on our past successes. We are constantly
working to further improve our products and
to streamline our processes. We continue
to lead the industry in innovation, safety,
and reliability. Researchers from around the
world rely on Parr’s scientific and engineering design expertise.
4848 Reactor Controller with multiple expansion options.
See page 96.
Hinged Split Rings. Available on many of our larger
Reactor Systems throughout this catalog.
New Floor Stand System
with 10 liter Reactor and
Flexible Mantle Heater.
See page 44.
High Pressure / High Temperature Micro
Pressure Vessels. See page 142.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
4
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
1
We are continually expanding
our expertise for designing and
developing custom systems.
From single units to complex
multi reactor systems, we can
help find a solution for your
research needs.
Six
i re
reactor
actor
act
tor 459
4590
4590-based
0 base
basedd m
multi-reactor
ulti
ult
lti reac
reacttor
tor wi
with
ith
h aut
automa
automated
tomated
t d
sampling. See page 73.
Series 5400 Tubular Reactor shown with a three-zone
Split Tube Furnace. See page 76.
Continuous
C
tii
FFlow
l
S
Stirred
tii d R
Reactor
t S
System
t using
i new
Modular Stand System. See page 79.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
5
I
n
t
r
o
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
The User’s Responsibility
A
ll Parr reactors and pressure vessels are designed and manufactured
with great care to ensure safe operation when used within their prescribed temperature and pressure limits. But… the basic responsibility
for safety when using this equipment rests entirely with the user;
who must:
1. Select a reactor or pressure vessel which has the capability, pressure rating, corrosion resistance and design features that are suitable
for its intended use. Parr engineers will be glad to discuss available
equipment and material options with prospective users, but the final
responsibility for selecting a reactor or pressure vessel that will perform
to the user’s satisfaction in any particular reaction or test must rest
with the user — not with Parr.
In exercising the responsibility for the selection of pressure equipment, the prospective user is often faced with a choice between over or
under-designed equipment. The hazards introduced by under-designed
pressure vessels are readily apparent, but the penalties that must be
paid for over-designed apparatus are often overlooked.
Recognizing these criteria, Parr reactors and pressure vessels are
offered in several different styles, each designed for convenient use in
daily operation within certain temperature and pressure limits, using
gaskets, closures and other elements carefully selected for safe operation within the limits specified for that design. But in order to preserve
the validity of these designs, all temperature and pressure limits must
be observed, and no attempt should be made to increase these limits
by making alterations or by substituting components which are not
recommended by Parr Instrument Company.
2. Install and operate the equipment within a suitable barricade, if
required, with appropriate safety accessories and in full compliance with
local safety codes and rules.
All standard Parr pressure vessels are provided with either a suitable
relief device or a means to attach one (typically in the form of a plugged
opening). When a pressure vessel is delivered without a pressure venting device, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide pressure relief
in order to protect the operator and the equipment from destructive
high pressures. If you need more information or need help in selecting
a proper relief device, please contact Parr Instrument Company.
3. Establish training procedures to ensure that any person handling
the equipment knows how to use it properly.
4. Maintain the equipment in good condition and establish procedures for periodic testing to be sure the vessel remains structurally
sound.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
6
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 1
Design
Features
Inside this chapter you will find:
DESIGN CODES
CERTIFICATION
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
ISO 9001:2008
ASME
PED
PARR
CSA
CE
CHINA
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
ALLOY DESIGNATIONS
PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE
LIMITS
MAGNETIC DRIVES
SPLIT-RING CLOSURES
GASKETS & SEALS
MOUNTING STYLES
WARRANTY
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
8
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
t
u
r
e
s
1
Design Codes and Certification
esign criteria specified in
the ASME Code for Unfired
Pressure vessels are closely
observed in the manufacture and
testing of all Parr pressure equipment. Cylinders for each reactor
and pressure vessel of standard
design are machined from
solid, hot-rolled or forged bars
of selected corrosion resistant
alloys with no seams or welds in
the vessel as potential sources of
weakness or localized corro-sion.
Each individual cylinder is tested
hydrostatically. For vessels
bearing ASME Certification Mark
with “U” Certification designator,
the minimum hydrostatic test
pressure is 1.3 times the rated
working pressure corrected for
temperature. For CE marked
pressure vessels the minimum
hydrostatic test pressure is the
higher of 1.43 times the rated
working pressure or 1.25 times
the rated working pressure
corrected for temperature. Each
complete reactor and vessel is
tested with nitrogen to be sure
that it is leak-free and operating
properly.
Protection against equipment
damage and possible personal
injury in case of an accidental
over-pressurization is typically
provided by a safety rupture
disc installed in the head of each
reactor and in each gage block
assembly. A description of these
safety discs and rules to be
observed in their selection and
use are given on page 116.
D
Quality Assurance
Parr Instrument Company
has designed, installed and
operates under a Quality
Assurance Program which
ensures that all aspects of the
design, materials selection and
procurement, manufacture,
testing and certification of its
pressure vessels are performed
in accordance with accepted
codes and practices. Currently
this Quality Assurance Program
has been certified to be in
compliance with ISO 9001: 2008
for Total Quality Procedures,
ASME, CSA (Canadian Standards
Association), and all applicable
European Directives (CE) which
include but are not limited
to PED (Pressure Equipment
Directive), LVD (Low Voltage
Directive), EMC (Electromagnetic
compatibility), and Machinery
Safety.
ISO 9001: 2008 Certification
Parr Instrument Company’s
overall Quality Assurance
System has been certified to be
in compliance with ISO 9001:
2008 by TÜV SÜD. ISO 9001:
2008 covers the overall quality
assurance and management
compliance aspects of Parr’s
activities as opposed to the certification of an individual product.
ASME Certification
Parr Instrument Company
holds a Certificate of Authorization issued by the Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Committee
of the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
and the National Board of Boiler
& Pressure Vessel Inspections
(NBBI) as an approved facility for
manufacturing unfired pressure
vessels. If required, any Parr
reactor or pressure vessel can
be certified to the ASME BPVC,
Section VIII, Division 1, which
involves:
1. Vessel inspection and tests
by an Authorized Inspector
of the National Board of
Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors.
2. Issuance of Form U-1 or
U-1A, “Manufacturer’s Data
Report for Pressure Vessels”,
which provides all relevant
documentation of the finished
vessel including certification
of the chemical analysis and
physical properties of materials used in the vessel.
3. Application of the ASME
Certification Mark with “U”
Certification Designator to the
vessel by the Inspector.
4. Registration of the vessel
with the National Board.
There is an added charge for
this special certification. It should
be noted that unless specifically
requested, ASME certification
provided by Parr will cover the
vessel only and not the relief
device. Parr can furnish certain
relief devices with ASME certification upon request – see page
116 for further details.
Parr is also certified under
Section IX of the ASME Code
for welding. Normally welding
is done only to attach jackets or
fittings to the primary vessel.
PED Certification
Parr Instrument Company
has implemented, operates and
maintains a quality assurance
system as described in the
Pressure Equipment Directive
Annex III, Module H/H1 for the
scope of Design and Manufacture
of Pressure Reactors and
Assemblies for Laboratory
Applications.
A Commitment to a
Worldwide Market
In 1973, Parr Instrument Company made a
commitment to serve customers on a worldwide basis
in a reliable and continuing manner. Parr products
were exhibited for the first time at Achema in Frankfurt,
Germany that year. An extensive effort was initiated to
select and train a network of local agents to provide
technical sales and service support as well as import
services in each of the countries where modern
chemical research and development is conducted.
In 1982, Parr Instrument Company was awarded
the President’s E Award for Excellence in Exporting in
recognition of our successful efforts in this area. In 1988,
Parr was awarded the U.S. Department of Commerce’s
highest level award the President’s E Star Award for
Excellence in Exporting in recognition of our continuing
and accelerating success in servicing the world market.
Today, Parr pressure reaction equipment is in use
in over 80 countries and active exclusive agents are
operating in 28 of these. Today, over half of all Parr
pressure reaction equipment is exported from the
USA. As a part of this expansion in the world market,
international considerations are designed into, not
added onto, all Parr equipment.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
9
Certification, continued
PARR
®
Parr Certification
If requested, Parr will furnish a
signed certificate listing the materials of
construction used in the manufacture of
an individual reactor or pressure vessel,
the pressure tests applied to that reactor,
material certificates and dimensional
drawings. There is an added charge for
this certification.
CSA Certification
Where appropriate, Parr reactors are
manufactured and certified to the electrical code established by the Canadian
Standards Association. Identification of
those units for which CSA Certification
has been received will be provided upon
request. The CSA logo is shown on the
nameplate of each CSA certified unit.
CE Certification
Where appropriate, Parr reactors will
carry the CE Mark certifying compliance
with all applicable European Community
Directives.
CHINA
China Special Equipment
Manufacture License
Where appropriate, Parr reactors
will bear the China Special Equipment
Manufacture License number issued by
AQSIQ of the People’s Republic of China
for manufacture of its pressure vessels.
Other National or Local Codes
Parr regularly works with other
national, state or international authorities to obtain individual approval for
specific vessels. Parr has obtained Pattern
Approval for pressure vessels in China
and CRN Approval for pressure vessels
in all Canadian provinces. The internationally recognized Quality Assurance
Program in place at Parr and the experience of the Parr engineering department
in working with these authorities makes
it possible to obtain these approvals with
little difficulty. It is the user’s responsibility to identify any such applicable
code so that these requirements can be
met before the vessel is fabricated and
delivered. Parr’s network of international
distributors are familiar with the applicable codes for pressure vessels within
their countries of responsibility.
Materials of Construction
arr reactors are normally
made of Type 316 Stainless
Steel, but they can also be made
of other alloys as well. Available
construction materials includes:
• Type 316/316L Stainless Steel
• Alloy A-286
• Alloy 20
• Alloy 230
• Alloy 400
• Alloy 600
• Alloy 625
• Alloy B-2/B-3
• Alloy C-276
• Nickel 200
• Tantalum
• Titanium Grades 2, 3, 4, & 7
• Zirconium 702 & 705
• Other material may be
available upon request
P
each of the basic corrosion
resistance categories, rather than
catalog and stock all three.
Each of these alloys has its
own physical strength and temperature characteristics as well
as its own unique resistance to
certain corrosive materials. All of
these factors must be considered
when making a selection, with
cost and availability also becoming factors in the final choice.
The basic composition of
these alloys is listed in Table I.
Corrosion resistance information
can be obtained from various
corrosion handbooks and metallurgical publications. Helpful
information can also be obtained
from the individual alloy
manufacturers.
Any abridged listing of corroAlloy Designation
sion resistance of various metals
Parr uses alloy designation
and alloys can be potentially
numbers to identify the various
misleading since it can not poscorrosion resistant alloys availsibly deal with all of
able for use in
Parr Instrument
the effects of concenParr reactors and
Company will attempt
tration, temperature,
pressure vessels.
to answer questions
pressure and the presThese alloys can
regarding corrosion
ence of additional ions,
also be identified
resistance and will
all of which have a
by trade names and
suggest materials
significant effect upon
by ASTM, ASME,
that might be suitable
DIN and other speci- for specific applications, the ability of a reactor
to withstand corrosion.
fication numbers.
but no guarantee can
In addition, the vulnerMany of the high
be made that any
particular alloy will
ability of any material
nickel alloys were
be fully reasistant to
to stress corrosion
originally patented
a prescribed set
cracking, intergranular
and sold under
of corrosive
corrosion and pitting
trade names, such
conditions.
must also be considas Monel1, Inconel1,
ered when judging
Incoloy1, Carpenter
the suitability of a material for a
Alloy 202, Hastelloy3, etc. Most of
particular application.
the original patents have expired
The principal characteristics of
and these alloys are now materithe construction materials offered
als of construction available from
by Parr are summarized on the
other reputable suppliers, as
following pages. These listings
well as from the owners of the
are intended to serve only as a
original trade names.
starting point for any study of
Among the many corrosion
comparative corrosion resistance
resistant alloys now available,
and physical properties. Material
there may be two or three with
manufacturers booklets on each
very similar compositions and
alloy are available on our website
intended for use in the same
at www.parrinst.com. Additional
corrosive environment. In these
details may also be obtained from
cases, Parr will select and offer
other sources.
the most widely used alloy in
1
2
3
MONEL, INCONEL and INCOLOY are Registered Trademarks of Special Metals Corp.
CARPENTER 20 is a Registered Trademark of Carpenter Technology Corporation.
HASTELLOY is a Registered Trademark of Haynes International, Inc.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
10
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
Type 316/316L Stainless Steel
Type 316 Stainless Steel is an excellent material
for use with most organic systems. A few organic
acids and organic halides can, under certain conditions, hydrolyze to form inorganic halogen acids
which will attack T316SS. Acetic, formic and other
organic acids are routinely handled in T316SS.
T316SS is not normally the material of choice for
inorganic acid systems. At ambient temperatures
it does offer useful resistance to dilute sulfuric,
sulfurous, phosphoric and nitric acids, but sulfuric,
phosphoric and nitric acids readily attack T316SS
at elevated temperatures and pressures. Halogen
acids attack all forms of stainless steel rapidly,
even at low temperatures and in dilute solutions.
Although T316SS offers excellent resistance to
surface corrosion by caustics, they can cause stress
corrosion cracking in stainless pressure vessels.
This phenomenon begins to appear at temperatures
just above 100 °C and has been the most common
cause of corrosion failure in stainless laboratory
vessels. T316SS does offer good resistance to
ammonia and to most ammonia compounds.
Halogen salts can cause severe pitting in all
stainless steels. Chlorides can cause stress corrosion cracking, but many other salt solutions can be
handled in stainless vessels, particularly neutral or
alkaline salts.
At moderate temperatures and pressures,
T316SS can be used with most commercial gases.
In scrupulously anhydrous systems even hydrogen
chloride, hydrogen fluoride and chlorine can be
used in stainless steel.
Essentially all of the T316SS produced today
also meets the specifications for T316L, low carbon
stainless steel.
Alloy 20
Alloy 20 is an enriched grade
of stainless steel, designed specifically for use with dilute (up to
30 percent by weight) sulfuric acid
at elevated temperatures. It can
also be used for nitric and phosphoric acid systems as well as for
all systems for which T316SS is
suitable.
Alloy 400
Alloy 400 is an alloy comprised
essentially of two-thirds nickel
and one-third copper. For many
applications it offers about the
same corrosion resistance as
nickel, but with higher maximum
working pressures and temperatures and at a lower cost
because of its greatly improved
machinability.
Table I
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
Alloy 400 is widely used for caustic solutions
because it is not subject to stress corrosion cracking in most applications. Chloride salts do not
cause stress corrosion cracking in Alloy 400. It is
also an excellent material for fluorine, hydrogen
fluoride and hydrofluoric acid systems. Alloy 400
offers some resistance to hydrochloric and sulfuric
acids at modest temperatures and concentrations,
but it is seldom the material of choice for these
acids. As would be expected from its high copper
content, Alloy 400 is rapidly attacked by nitric acid
and ammonia systems.
Alloy 600
Alloy 600 is a high nickel alloy offering excellent resistance to caustics and chlorides at high
temperatures and high pressures when sulfur
compounds are present. In caustic environments,
Alloy 600 is unexcelled. It also is often chosen for
its high strength
at elevated temperatures. Although it can be
recommended for a broad range of corrosive
conditions, its cost often limits its use to only those
applications where its exceptional characteristics
are required.
t
u
r
e
s
1
All Parr raw
materials are
carefully
identified
throughout the
manufacturing
process for
traceability —
as required by
ASME and
other codes.
Alloy B-2/B-3
Alloy B-2/B-3 is an alloy, rich in nickel and
molybdenum, which has been developed primarily for resistance to reducing acid environments,
particularly hydrochloric, sulfuric and phosphoric.
Its resistance to these acids in pure forms is
unsurpassed, but the presence of ferric and other
oxidizing ions in quantities as low as 50 ppm can
dramatically degrade the resistance of this alloy.
Continued, next page >
Nominal Chemical Composition of Pressure Vessel Materials
Major Elements (Percent)
Material
T316 Stainless Steel
Alloy 20
Alloy 230
Alloy 600
Alloy 625 Gr1
A-286
Alloy B-2/B-3
Alloy C-276
Nickel 200
Titanium Grade 2, 3, 4
Typical Trade Name
Carpenter 20
Haynes 230
Inconel 600
Inconel 625 Gr1
Alloy 286
Hastelloy B-2/B-3
Hastelloy C-276
Fe
65
35
3
8
5
53
2
6.5
Ni
12
34
52
76
58
25
66
53
99
Cr
17
20
22
15.5
22
15
1
15.5
Commercially
pure titanium
Mo
2.5
2.5
2
Mn
2.0
2.0
0.7
Other
Si 1.0
Cu 3.5, Cb 1.0 max
Co-5, W-14, Si-0.5
9
1.2
28
16
0.5
2
1
1
Cb+Ta 3.7
Si-1, Ti-2.1, Al-0.35
Co 1.0
W4.0, Co 2.5
Ti 99 min
Titanium Grade 7
Zirconium Grade 702
Ti 98.8 min, 0.15 Pd
Zr + Hf 99.2 min,
Hf 4.5 max
Zr + Hf 95.5 min,
Hf 4.5 max, Nb 2.5
Zirconium Grade 705
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
11
Materials, Continued
< Continued, from previous page
Alloy C-276
Alloy C-276 is a nickel chromium-molybdenum
alloy having perhaps the broadest general corrosion
resistance of all commonly used alloys. It was developed initially for use with wet chlorine, but it also
offers excellent resistance to strong oxidizers such as
cupric and ferric chlorides, and to a variety of chlorine
compounds and chlorine contaminated materials.
Because of its broad chemical resistance, Alloy C-276
is the second most popular alloy, following T316SS, for
vessels used in research and development work.
Nickel 200
Nickel 200 is one of the designations of commercially pure nickel. It offers the ultimate in corrosion
resistance to hot caustic environments, but its
applications are severely restricted because of its poor
machinability and resultant high fabrication costs.
Titanium
Titanium is an excellent material for use with
oxidizing agents, such as nitric acid, aqua regia and
other mixed acids. It also offers very good resistance
to chloride ions. Reducing acids, such as sulfuric and
hydrochloric, which have unacceptably high corrosion
rates in their pure form can have their corrosion rates
in titanium reduced to acceptable levels if relatively
small quantities of oxidizing ions, such as cupric, ferric,
nickel or even nitric acid are present to act as corrosion
inhibitors.
This phenomenon leads to many successful applications for titanium in the hydrometallurgy field where
acids, particularly sulfuric acid, are used to leach ores.
In these operations, the extracted ions act as corrosion
inhibitors.
Prospective users must remember that titanium will
burn vigorously in the presence of oxygen at elevated
temperatures and pressures. While there have been
many successful applications in hydrometallurgy
where oxygen and sulfuric acid are handled in titanium
equipment, the danger of ignition is always present
and must be protected against whenever titanium and
oxygen are used together.
Commercially pure titanium is available in several
grades. Grade 2 is the material most commonly used
for industrial equipment since it can be fabricated by
welding and can be used to make vessels compliant to
the PED and ASME codes. Grade 4, which has slightly
higher trace levels of iron and oxygen, has higher
strength than Grade 2 but it is not suitable for welding
and it is not covered by the PED or ASME Codes.
Since most Parr vessels are not welded, they usually are made of Grade 4 to obtain higher working
pressures than can be obtained with Grade 2. Grade 7,
containing small amounts of palladium, and Grade 12
containing small amounts of nickel and molybdenum,
offer enhanced resistance to certain environments and
can be used for Parr reactors and pressure vessels if
suitable billets can be obtained.
Zirconium
Zirconium offers excellent resistance to hydrochloric and sulfuric acids, however, as with Alloy
B-2/B-3, oxidizing ions such as ferric, cupric and
fluorides must be avoided. Zirconium also offers
good resistance to phosphoric and nitric acids, and
to alkaline solutions as well. Two different grades
are available: Grade 702 which contains hafnium
is the standard commercial grade offering the best
resistance to most corrosive agents. Grade 705
contains small amounts of both hafnium and niobium which increases the strength characteristics
and allows for higher maximum working pressures
for a vessel. Grade 702 typically offers better corrosion resistance than Grade 705. Grade 702 is also
more widely available from commercial stocks of
raw materials.
High Temperature / High Strength Alloys
In addition to the metals chosen for their corrosion resistance Parr also offers some alloys that are
selected for their outstanding strength values, their
high temperature strengths, or both.
Alloy 625
Alloy 625 is an alloy with chemical resistance
similar to Alloy C-276, but with much greater
strength. We use this alloy to obtain additional
pressure ratings for high temperature applications.
Alloy 230
Alloy 230 is an alloy approved for ASME pressure vessel design for temperatures up to 980 °C.
It is an alloy high in nickel, chromium, tungsten,
and cobalt. While it has resistance similar to Alloy
600, it is normally selected for its high strengths at
very high temperatures. It is sometime selected as
a bolting material.
Alloy A-286
Alloy A-286 is an alloy of the Stainless Steel
family with very high strengths up to 371 °C it is
commonly used as a bolting material.
Tantalum
For hot concentrated acid applications including
hydrochloric acid (HCl), sulfuric acid (H2SO4),
acetic acid, sour gas (H2S), and nitric acid,
tantalum offers excellent corrosion resistance but
at a very high price. A more cost effective solution
can be found in the treatment of the reactor with
vaporized tantalum, which results in a surface
layer with characteristics of pure tantalum metal.
Parr Instrument Company’s preferred vendor
for tantalum treatment is TANTALINE®. We can
arrange to have your reactor treated by this leading
producer of tantalum surface alloys.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
12
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
t
u
r
e
s
1
Pressure and Temperature Limits
T
he maximum pressure and temperature at
which any reactor or pressure vessel can be
used will depend upon the design of the vessel,
its material of construction, and other components
integral to its design. Since all materials lose
strength at elevated temperatures, any pressure rating must be stated in terms of the temperature at
which it applies. The listings shown in this catalog
show the maximum allowable working pressure
(MAWP) for each vessel in pounds per square inch
(psi) and in bar at the maximum rated temperature
for that particular design when that vessel is
constructed of Type 316 Stainless Steel. Maximum
pressure and temperature limits for vessels constructed of other alloys are computed and assigned
by the Parr Engineering Department in accordance
with all applicable regulations.
Lower operating temperatures sometimes
permit higher working pressures. For example, the
4560HT High Temperature reactors are rated at
2000 psi (138 bar) maximum pressure and 500 °C
maximum temperature. Standard 4560 reactors are
rated at 3000 psi (200 bar) maximum pressure at
350 °C maximum temperature.
One should not assume that any vessel being
operated at a lower temperature can be used at
pressures exceeding the rated MAWP. Factors other
than the material strength of the vessel wall may
well be the constraint controlling the rating. Other
factors that can limit the pressure and temperature
ratings are the closures design, the magnetic drive,
the type of seal, the choice of other components
used, as well as the material of construction.
The maximum operational temperature of some
materials is much lower than what is permissible
with stainless steel as shown in Table II. Users are
encouraged to contact the Parr Customer Service
Department with any questions.
Multiple factors are involved
in safely calculating the
maximum working pressures and
temperatures of Parr Pressure
Vessels and Reactors. Please
contact Parr Customer Service
Department for more information
and to assist you in making the
correct purchase decision.
Table II
Maximum Allowable Temperatures
Materials of Construction
Maximum Temperature
T316/316L Stainless Steel
A-286
Alloy 20
Alloy 230
Alloy 400
Alloy 600
Alloy 625 Gr 1
Alloy B-2/B-3
Alloy C-276
Nickel 200
Titanium Grade 2, 3, 4, 7
Zirconium Grade 702, 705
800 °C
371 °C
426 °C
980 °C
482 °C
625 °C
648 °C
426 °C
625 °C
315 °C
315 °C
371 °C
Maximum pressure
and temperature
ratings for vessels
constructed of alloys
other than T316SS
will be computed
and assigned by the
Parr Engineering
Department.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
13
High Torque Magnetic Drives
ll Parr stirred reactors are
equipped with a magnetic
drive to provide a trouble-free
linkage to an internal stirrer,
thereby avoiding the leakage
problems which can arise with a
packed gland stirrer drive. With
a Parr magnetic drive there are
no rotating seals. The drive turns
freely and the system remains
gas-tight, permitting long,
continuous runs at pressures up
to 5000 psi (345 bar) with little
or no attention to the seal and
drive.
Parr drives are assembled
with specially designed permanent magnets which have
excellent temperature stability
and can be depended upon to
operate for long periods with
little or no flux degradation.
Magnets for the inner rotor to
which the stirrer shaft is attached
are enclosed in a stainless steel
(or other alloy) housing, permanently sealed by laser welding
and supported by graphite-filled,
PTFE bushings to provide a long
life, chemically inert stirring
system. Magnets for the outer
drive are also fully enclosed and
supported by twin, high quality
sealed ball bearings for smooth
operation and long life. A water
cooling sleeve attached to each
drive protects the components
from excessive heat arising from
the reactor.
A
Four Sizes
Parr magnetic drives are
made in four sizes, designed to
match the full range of Parr reactor sizes and to provide alternate
drives for high viscosity loads,
higher stirring speeds and other
special requirements. Each drive
is assembled in a sealed housing
which threads directly into the
reactor head.
The A1120HC and A1180HC
models are the standard units
normally furnished with the
reactor sizes listed in the adjoining table. The A1750HC2 model
is a special high torque drive
intended primarily for heavy
loads and high viscosity applications. When it is used to replace
a standard drive, the standard
motor and drive system may
have to be modified to provide
the higher torque which the
A1750HC2 drive is capable of
transmitting.
Significant progress was made in recent years in both magnetic
materials and magnetic coupling design. Parr uses neodymium-ironboron magnets with 25% more coupling force than samarium-cobalt
magnets. With very few exceptions involving gear reduction drives,
the magnetic stirrers fitted to reactors have higher coupling torques
than the stall conditions of standard motors. Today magnetic drives
are used with confidence for high viscosity polymerization reactions.
Parr magnetic drives are supported with three graphite-filled
PTFE bushings and quality internal ball bearings. They routinely deliver
2000 hours of operation without service.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
14
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
The 5500 Series Compact
Reactors have a smaller magnetic drive that is used with a
1/17 hp motor. It is intended for
low viscosity applications and
has a torque rating of 2.5 in-lb.
Two Styles Available
Parr offers a choice of two
styles of magnetic drives. The
general purpose A1120HC,
A1180HC and A1750HC2 operate
with small diameter stirrer shafts
which require a lower guide or
“foot” bearing to stabilize the
stirrer shaft. These drives are
intended for high speed stirring
for applications involving liquidliquid or gas-liquid mixing. The
A2140HC, A2160HC and A2170HC
footless magnetic drives employ
a larger diameter stirrer shaft
designed to operate without this
lower guide or “foot” bearing.
They were originally designed
for digesting ores where the
abrasive solids would get caught
in the PTFE foot bearing and
wear away the stirrer shaft. They
are also recommended for
Parr Magnetic Drive Series
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
t
u
Magnetic Drive
Foot Bushing
Required?
(see text above)
Ordering Guide
Abbreviation
Supplied as Standard
Mag Drive on Reactors
with these Volumes:
General Purpose
16
3/16”
Yes
M
25 mL to 2 L
16
3/8”
No (Footless)
FMD1
60
3/8”
Yes
HD
60
5/8”
No (Footless)
FMD2
120
3/8”
Yes
XHD
120
5/8”
No (Footless)
FMD3
2.5
3/16”
Yes
N/A
Compact
s
1
Alternate Packed
Gland Drive
For rare circumstances where
a direct mechanical drive is preferable to a magnetically coupled
system, Parr can furnish a selfsealing packed gland which will
maintain a reliable seal on the
stirrer shaft at working pressures
up to 2000 psig (138 bar). These
glands are made to a Parr design
which uses a combination of
cones and O-rings in conjunction
with pressure from within the
vessel to maintain a positive seal
on the rotating shaft.
Today, with the variety of
magnetic drive styles and high
coupling torques, virtually all
reactors except special application systems are equipped with
magnetic drives.
Shaft Diameter
(inches)
Extra Heavy Duty
e
slower speed mixers such as the
anchor, paddle, or spiral stirrers.
It is also important to select the
appropriate motor which can
handle the increased drag associated with the larger diameter
shafts.
Coupling Torque
(in-lbs)*
Heavy Duty
r
1- to 5-Gallon
1- to 5-Gallon
5500 Compact Reactor
* in-lb = 0.11 Newton Meter
Please see the Parr Magnetic Drives Operating Manual (234M)
at http://www.parrinst.com/files/234M_Parr_Magnetic-Drive-inst.pdf for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
15
Split Ring Closures
Split-Ring with Compression Bolts
for Moveable Vessels
Split-Ring with Captive Compression Ring
and Bolts for Fixed Head Vessels
Split-Ring
U.S. Patent No.
2625296
We have all heard the story of the man who
resigned from the Patent Office around 1900
because he believed that everything that could
be invented already had been. That is not the
philosophy that has driven Parr Instrument
Company over its more than a century of
service to the chemical industry. The following
prediction first appeared in February 1930 in the
“Forward” of our bulletin describing our catalytic
hydrogenation apparatus.
“The greatest chemical discoveries are yet
Split-Ring for Self Sealing
O-ring Closures
Easy Access to
Pressure Vessels
Parr reactors and pressure vessels are equipped
with a unique split-ring cover
clamp which adds greatly to the
convenience of the equipment
and the ease with which it can
be handled. This is an exclusive
Parr design (see sidebar) which
allows easy access to a pressure
vessel without using a heavy
screw cap, cumbersome cover
clamps, or a wide flange for
moveable bolts. Instead, the
head is clamped to the cylinder
by either a Type 4140 steel or
a Type 316 Stainless Steel ring
which has been split into two
sections. These sections slide
into place from the sides without
interfering with any fittings
attached to the head.
to be made, untold numbers of which will result
from the new studies in catalysis and catalytic
reactors. These studies have already unearthed
a mine of information, but with a more exact
knowledge of catalytic processes, much more
will be learned in the future.”
We are delighted with the foresight of our
predecessors here at Parr and are dedicated
to continuing this outlook for the future as we
conduct our second century of service to our
friends and customers in this critical industry.
Self-Sealing and
Compression Bolt Designs
Parr split-ring cover clamps
are made in two styles. For
reactors and vessels in which
a self-sealing O-ring is used as
the main head seal, there are
no compression bolts in the
split-ring sections. The vessel
is closed by simply sliding the
two ring sections into place and
locking them with either an encircling drop band or with attached,
quick-opening latches. This con-
venient closure can be used on
most small and mid-sized stirred
reactors and pressure vessels,
provided the intended operating
temperature does not exceed the
allowable working temperature
limit for the O-ring seal.
Split ring closures for reactors
with PTFE, flexible graphite,
metal or other contained, flat
gaskets have a set of compression bolts in the rings which
must be tightened to develop the
compressive force required to
seal the gasket. These split rings
are locked together with either
a drop band or quick opening
latches.
With either style, the closure
parts come completely away
from the vessel so that the head
with all of its fittings can be
lifted from the cylinder or the
cylinder can be dropped away
without disrupting any attached
fittings. When compression
bolts are used, they are simply
tightened or loosened, they are
never completely removed from
the split ring or drop band. This
saves time both in opening and
closing the vessel and in looking
for lost parts.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
16
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
Split-Ring with Compression Bolts
and Drop Band
e
s
i
g
Split-Ring with Drop Band and
No Compression Bolts
n
F
e
a
t
u
r
e
s
1
Split-Ring with Compression Bolts,
Latches, and No Drop Band
Split-ring closures add
many attractive features to
Parr reactors and pressure
vessels.
• The reactor or vessel can be
opened and closed without
disturbing any connections
or fittings attached to the
head.
• The full inside diameter of
the vessel is exposed when
the head is removed.
• A maximum area is exposed
on the head for attaching
valves and fittings.
• There are no cumbersome
bolt flanges or threaded
studs to interfere with operations, and
• No delicate threads on the
cylinder to gall or to be damaged in handling.
Screw Cap Closures
Parr uses screw cap closures
on small vessels where enough
sealing force can be developed
by simply tightening the main
screw cap. This design can be
made more compact than the
split ring closure and is used
primarily on general purpose
vessels with volumes of less
than 100 mL.
Hinged Split Rings
Screw Cap Closure
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
17
Gasket and Seals
here are four different types
of gasketing material for the
main head seal in Parr reactors
and pressure vessels, each
with its own advantages and
limitations. Some of these are
recent additions which have significantly expanded the choices a
user can consider when selecting
a closure and gasket material
for the intended operating
conditions.
T
Flat PTFE Gasket
O-ring FKM Seal
Flat Flexible Graphite Gasket
Confined and Contained
Flat PTFE Gaskets for
Temperatures to 350 °C
The traditional and most
popular main head gasket for
Parr vessels is a flat gasket made
of a PTFE fluoropolymer. In Parr
flat gasket closures, the gasket
is held in a recess in the vessel
cover. The mating lip on the cylinder closes the recess, leaving
the gasket completely confined
with only a small inside edge
exposed to the reactants within
the vessel. This combination of
complete gasket containment
and the exceptional properties
of PTFE materials produces a
reliable closure for working
temperatures up to 350 °C.
Flat contained gaskets require
an initial loading pressure in
order to develop and to maintain
a tight seal. In Parr designs this
is produced by tightening a ring
of compression bolts in a splitring cover clamp. Fortunately
PTFE is slightly “plastic” and will
flow under pressure, producing a
seal that improves with each use
as the gasket is forced into the
faces on the head and cylinder.
It also is a very forgiving seal
which does not require the
special care needed to achieve
a uniform loading, which is
essential when working with a
metal or other non-plastic gasket
material.
An equally important advantage of the PTFE gaskets is their
essentially universal chemical
resistance.
Self-Sealing O-rings
Parr has greatly expanded its
offerings of reactors and vessels
which feature self-sealing O-ring
closures. In these designs the
sealing force on the gasket is
developed from pressure within
the vessel itself, eliminating the
need for compression bolts in
the split ring to pre-load the seal.
In these self-sealing closures the
split ring sections simply lock the
head and cylinder together.
Users who select the self sealing O-ring design must consider
two important characteristics
of elastometric materials. First,
they will not withstand operating
temperatures as high as the PTFE
gaskets. Secondly, none of these
materials offers the universal
chemical resistance of PTFE polymers. The chemical resistance
is especially important since the
O-ring is directly exposed to the
contents of the vessel.
Although there are a number
of available O-ring materials, the
real choice comes down to two.
Fluoroelastomer (FKM) O-rings,
such as Viton, are a first choice
for Parr self-sealing closures.
They have good chemical resistance and a working temperature
up to 225 °C. Perfluoroelastomer
(FFKM) O-rings, such as Kalrez,
have extremely broad chemical
resistance and can be used at
working temperatures up to
300 °C. Unfortunately, this
High Pressure Metal Gasket
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
18
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
Other exotic O-ring materials are
available, and there are economically priced materials such as
ethylene-propylene that will
resist some materials that cause
FKM to fail, with only slight sacrifices in operating temperatures.
O-ring Main Head Seal with
Retaining Lip
material should probably be
considered an “exotic” because
it costs approximately 80 times
as much as an FKM O-ring. While
it will raise the allowable working
temperature to 300 °C, as a practical matter, most users intending
to work at this temperature level
would be well advised to choose
a closure with a flat PTFE gasket
and a 350 °C temperature limit.
Contained Flat Flexible
Graphite Gaskets for
Temperatures to 600 °C
For operating temperatures
above 350 °C, Parr uses a flexible
form of graphite, called Grafoil®,
which has proven to be an excellent high temperature sealing
material. It consists of flexible layers of graphite bonded
together to produce a gasket that
is almost as easy to seal as a flat,
PTFE gasket, but with an almost
unlimited temperature range and
excellent chemical resistance.
Parr has converted all of its
standard designs to accept a
flat, Grafoil gasket whenever
operating temperatures above
350 °C are required, replacing
the metal gaskets formerly used
for high temperatures. These
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
t
u
r
e
s
1
flexible graphite gaskets are held
in grooves identical to the ones
used for PTFE gaskets and sealed
with the same split-ring closures.
This makes it possible to substitute a PTFE gasket whenever
the vessel is to be used at temperatures below 350 °C. Grafoil
gaskets are reusable, but their
service life is shorter than can be
obtained with a PTFE gasket.
Metal Gaskets
Metal gaskets have traditionally been the only gaskets
available for use at temperatures
above 350 °C. Parr has designs
for diamond cross-section metal
gaskets which can be furnished
for special applications, but we
would recommend the flexible
graphite gaskets described above
for most applications.
Trademarks of Sealing Materials
A number of gasketing materials have so dominated their product categories that their Trade Names
have become more common than the actual material designation itself. In an attempt to respect the
value of these Trade Names and their proper usage and to minimize the disruptions in our descriptions,
we have adopted the following generic material descriptions and designations for use in this catalog.
Where available we have selected the ASTM material designation.
Common
or Trade Name
Material
Designation
Viton®
fluoroelastomer
FKM
Kalrez®
perfluoroelastomer
FFKM
Teflon®
tetrafluoroethylene polymer
PTFE
Grafoil®
flexible graphite
FG
Viton®, Kalrez®,Teflon® are Registered Trademarks of DuPont.
Grafoil® is a Registered Trademark of UCAR Carbon Co. Inc.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
19
Two Mounting Styles
Fixed Head Reactors
Parr offers most of its laboratory reactors in a fixed head
design. This includes all reactors
with volumes from 25 mL to 20
liters. In these reactors the head
of the vessel may remain fixed
in the reactor support stand. All
attachments to the head: gas and
liquid feed and discharge lines,
cooling water, vapor take-off
and condenser, thermocouple
and any electrical leads can
remain permanently in place.
The reactor is opened by simply
removing the split ring and lowering the cylinder away from the
head, leaving all of the attachments undisturbed. If desired
the complete vessel assembly
can be removed from the head
support plate.
The support frames for fixed
head reactors vary based on the
sizes and weights of the vessels:
• For vessels with volumes
of 25 mL to 600 mL, the
cylinder may be lowered and
removed manually by the
operator.
• Vessels with volumes of 1 to
2 liters include a manual lift
mechanism to raise or lower
the cylinder.
• Vessels with volumes greater
than two liters or where
weight dictates include
a pneumatic cylinder lift
mechanism.
Model 4523 Reactor, Fixed Head, 1 liter.
Close up view of a fixed head reactor with the
cylinder and heater lowered.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
20
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
D
e
s
i
g
n
F
e
a
t
u
r
e
s
1
Moveable Vessel Reactors
As an alternate to the fixed
head designs described on the
previous page, all Parr reactors
can be furnished in designs
which allow the entire vessel
to be removed as a complete
assembly from the support stand
allowing for charging, product
recovery, and cleaning. In the
smaller and mid-sized models
the entire vessel is simply lifted
out of the stand by hand. In the
larger 1, 2, 5 gallon, and 10 liter
models the vessel can be opened
and closed with the cylinder
remaining in the heater, but the
head must be lifted off by hand.
In the larger 5 gallon and 10 liter
models a chain hoist is provided
for lifting the heavier head and
cylinder.
These moveable reactors will
be attractive to users that intend
to operate fairly simple batch
systems rather than continuous
flow arrangements, and that
want to be able to remove the
vessel for product recovery,
charging or cleaning. They will
also appeal to those that need to
prepare the vessel in a special
atmosphere, or want to clean
the cylinder and stirrer at a site
away from the reactor stand and
heater. There is also the added
advantage of being less expensive than the fixed head models
since they do not require the
more elaborate head or the cylinder and heater lift mechanism.
4544 Reactor, 600 mL, Moveable Vessel, Split Ring with Compression Bolts, and a 4848 Controller shown with
optional Expansion Modules.
600 mL High Pressure Moveable Vessel
for use to 5000 psi.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
21
Parr Instrument Company Warranty
Parr Instrument Company (Parr) combustion bombs, calorimeters, reactors, pressure vessels and
associated products are designed and manufactured only for use by or under the direct supervision of trained
professionals in accordance with specifications and instructions for use supplied with the products. For that
reason, Parr sells only to professional users or distributors to such users. Parr produces precision equipment
and associated products which are not intended for general commercial use.
Exclusive Warranty. To the extent allowed by law, the express and limited warranties herein are the
sole warranties. Any implied warranties are expressly excluded, including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
Warranty Conditions:
1. Non-assignable. The warranties herein extend only to the original purchaser-user and to the distributors to such users. These warranties or any action or claims based thereon are not assignable or transferable.
2. Use of product. The warranties herein are applicable and enforceable only when the Parr product:
(a) Is installed and operated in strict accordance with the written instructions for its use provided by Parr.
(b) Is being used in a lawful manner.
(c) Has not been modified by any entity other than Parr Instrument Company.
(d) Has been stored or maintained in accordance with written instructions provided by Parr, or if none
were provided, has been stored and maintained in a professionally reasonable manner.
3. The user’s responsibility. Parr engineers and sales personnel will gladly discuss available equipment and material options with prospective users, but the final responsibility for selecting a reactor, pressure
vessel or combustion bomb which has the capacity, pressure rating, chemical compatibility, corrosion
resistance and design features required to perform safely and to the user’s satisfaction in any particular
application or test must rest entirely with the user – not with Parr. It is also the user’s responsibility to install
the equipment in a safe operating environment and to train all operating personnel in appropriate safety,
operational and maintenance procedures.
4. Warranty period. Unless otherwise provided in writing by Parr, the warranties herein are applicable
for a period of one year from date of delivery of the product to the original purchaser/user. Note, however,
that there is no guarantee of a service life of one year after delivery.
5. Notification. To enforce any express warranty created herein, the purchaser/user must notify Parr
in writing within thirty (30) days of the date any defect is detected. Upon request of Parr, the part or product
involved must be returned to Parr in the manner specified by Parr for analysis and non-destructive testing.
Express Warranties.
Subject to the above Conditions, Parr expressly warrants that its products:
1. Are as described in the applicable Parr sales literature, or as specified in Parr shipping documents.
2. Will function as described in corresponding Parr sales bulletins or, for specially engineered assemblies,
as stated in the sales proposal and purchase agreement.
3. Will remain free from defects in materials and workmanship for the Warranty Period.
Limitations on the Parr Warranty.
As to the original purchaser/user and to the distributors to such users, Parr limits its liability for claims
other than personal injury as follows:
1. Replacement or repair. With respect to express warranties herein, Parr’s only obligation is to replace or
repair any parts, assemblies or products not conforming to the warranties provided herein.
2. Disclaimer of consequential damages. In no event shall Parr be liable for consequential commercial
damages, including but not limited to: damages for loss of use, damages for lost profits, and damages for
resulting harm to property other than the Parr product and its component parts.
Indemnity and Hold Harmless.
Original purchaser user agrees to indemnify and hold Parr harmless for any personal injuries to original
purchaser user, its employees and all third parties where said injuries arise from misuse of Parr products or
use not in accordance with specifications and instructions for use supplied with the Parr products.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
22
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 2
Stirred
Reactor
Systems
Inside this chapter you will find:
REACTOR SELECTION GUIDE
4520 BENCH TOP, 1000 & 2000 mL
4520 HP BENCH TOP, 970 & 1900 mL
4530 MOVEABLE CART OR FLOOR
STAND, 1000 & 2000 mL
4530 HP MOVEABLE CART OR FLOOR
STAND, 970 & 1900 mL
4540 BENCH TOP, FLOOR STAND,
OR CART, HIGH PRESSURE, 600 &
1200 mL
4550 GENERAL PURPOSE, CART OR
FLOOR STAND, 1 & 2 GALLON
(3.75 & 7.99 L)
4555 GENERAL PURPOSE, FLOOR
STAND, 2.6 & 5 GALLON (10 & 18.75 L)
4560 MINI, BENCH TOP, 100-600 mL
4560 HT MINI, BENCH TOP, 300-600 mL
4570 HP/HT, BENCH TOP, CART, OR
FLOOR STAND, 250-1800 mL
4580 HP/HT, CART OR FLOOR STAND,
1 & 1.5 GALLON (3.75 & 5.5 L)
4590 MICRO, BENCH TOP, 25-100 mL
4590 HP MICRO, BENCH TOP, 25-100 mL
4590 HP/HT MICRO, BENCH TOP,
25-100 mL
5100 LOW PRESSURE GLASS & METAL,
160-1500 mL
5500 COMPACT HIGH PRESSURE
REACTORS, 25-600 mL
Reactor Selection Guide
“
It is possible to
convert most of
these reactors from
T
he selection process starts with establishing
the Four Basic Specifications discussed below. Having set these requirements, the user can
then identify a suitable series group from the
Guide to Parr Stirred Reactors. The user should
then review the standard fittings. Finally, a list
of Secondary Specifications should determine
some of the finer details of the system.
one size to another
within the same
series. This is done
1
Establish 4 Basic Specifications
by substituting a
longer or shorter
cylinder with
corresponding
internal fittings
including the stirrer
shaft, thermowell or
thermocouple, dip
tube and cooling
coil (if installed).
In some cases, the
heater will also
need to be changed.
The Parr Technical
Service department
will be happy to
provide a list of
the appropriate
conversion parts for
any contemplated
conversion.
”
1. Maximum Operating Pressure
Parr offers a number of operating pressures.
Vessels 600mL and under in volume are typically
rated for 3000 psi, and vessels 1L or larger are
typically rated for 1900 psi. We also offer 5000
psi versions of these sizes for those who need
this combination of smaller size and higher
pressure. Some pressure limits can be increased
with custom designs. However, higher pressure
vessels generally require thicker walls, which
can make temperature control more difficult, and
larger volume, high pressure vessels are heavier
and more difficult to handle. We also have a line
of 5100 Series Glass Reactors which can handle
pressures up to 150 psi with a glass cylinder or
up to 1000 psi with a metal cylinder.
2. Maximum Operating Temperature
Traditionally, the choices here have been up
to 350 °C for vessels with PTFE gaskets and up
to 500 °C for flexible graphite (previously metal
gaskets). Parr added the option of a self-sealing
O-ring closure for general purpose vessels over
a full range of volumes. These quick closing
designs are limited to 225 °C, although this can
be raised to 300 °C with special O-ring materials.
Moveable and Fixed Head Designs
A moveable head is best for when
you need to remove the entire reactor in one piece after running your
operation.
A fixed head allows you to remove
the cylinder and leave the head and
all of its attachments mounted to
the stand.
3. Vessel Size
Parr stirred reactors are offered in many sizes
ranging from 25mL to 18.75 liters (5-gallon). It
should be noted that these volumes refer to the
free space in the vessel, and for safe operation
the maximum liquid charge held in the vessel
should not exceed two-thirds of the available
free space in sealed batch operations. Generally,
several vessel volumes are offered within most
series, and reactor sizes can be reconfigured
with conversion parts.
4. Material of Construction
Parr reactors are normally made of Type 316
Stainless Steel, but they can be made of other
alloys as well.
The list of available construction materials
includes:
Type 316/316L Stainless Steel
Alloy 286
Alloy 20
Alloy 230
Alloy 400
Alloy 600
Alloy 625
Alloy B-2/B-3
Alloy C-276
Nickel 200
Titanium Grades 2, 3, 4, & 7
Zirconium 702 & 705
Other materials may be available upon
request. The majority of organic reactions can
be handled in a standard T316 Stainless Steel
vessel, but other corrosion resistant alloys are
available to provide vessels suitable for use with
a wide range of corrosive acids, bases, salts and
gases. Special alloy construction can be provided
for both the internal parts of the vessel and the
external valves and fittings. However, there are
considerable cost savings if the user can accept
standard external parts made of stainless steel
instead of a special alloy.
There is more detailed information on special
materials in the “Materials of Construction” section of Chapter 1 on pages 10-12 of this catalog.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
24
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
2
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
25
t
o
r
Select Appropriate Series
Series No.
Reactor Type
Nominal Size
Maximum
Pressure psi (bar)
Maximum
Temperature °C
4520
Mid-Size, Bench Top
1000 and 2000 mL
1900 (131)
225-350
4520 HP
Mid-Size, Bench Top, High Pressure
970 and 1900 mL
2900 (200)
350
4530
Mid-Size, Moveable Cart or Floor Stand
1000 and 2000 mL
1900 (131)
225-350
4530 HP
Mid-Size, Moveable Cart or Floor Stand,
High Pressure
970 and 1900 mL
2900 (200)
350
4540
Mid-Size, Bench Top, Floor Stand, or Cart,
High Pressure
600 and 1200 mL
5000 (345)
350
4550
General Purpose, Cart or Floor Stand
1 and 2 gallon (3.75 and 7.99 L)
1900 (131)
225-350
4555
General Purpose, Floor Stand
5 and 2.6 gallon (18.75 and 10 L)
1900 (131)
225-350
4560
Mini, Bench Top
100-600 mL
3000 (200)
225-350
4560 HT
Mini, Bench Top, High Temperature
300-600 mL
2000 (138)
500
4571-4572
4577-4578
High Pressure/High Temperature,
Cart or Floor Stand
1000 and 1800 mL
5000 (345)
500
4575A-4576A
4575B-4576B
High Pressure/High Temperature, Bench Top
250 and 500 mL
5000 (345)
500
4581-4584
High Press./High Temp., Cart or Floor Stand
1 and 1.5 gallon (3.75 L and
5.5 L)
3000 (200)
500
4590
Micro, Bench Top
25-100 mL
3000 (200)
225-350
4590 HP
Micro, Bench Top, High Pressure
25-100 mL
5000 (345)
350
4590 HP/HT
Micro, Bench Top, High Pressure,
High Temperature (Fixed Head Only)
25-100 mL
5000 (345)
500
5100
Low Pressure Glass or Metal Reactors
160 mL-1.5 L
150 (10.3) Glass
225
1000 (69) Metal
225-300
5500
Mini or Micro, Bench Top, Compact Stand
25-600 mL
3000 (200)
225-350
Size
25 mL
Pressures (psi)
18.75 L
Parr Instrument Company offers
laboratory reactors and pressure
vessels in sizes from 25 mL to
18.75 L. Generally it is best to select
a size that will allow for 1/3 free
space. This allows for some liquid
expansion during the heating phase
of a reaction.
1900
Temperatures
3000
5000
Maximum Allowable Working Pressures
(MAWP) are determined by adherence to the
ASME pressure vessel design criteria. There
are three ranges; up to 1900 psi, up to 5000
psi, and in most cases reactors in the 25 mL
to 600 mL range can be rated to 3000 psi. Parr
Instrument Company recommends research be
restricted to 90% of any vessels MAWP rating.
A vessel’s pressure capacity is directly tied to
the temperature the vessel will be operating.
225 °C
500 °C
Operating Temperatures have
traditionally been up to 350 °C using
a flat PTFE gasket. Flexible graphite
gaskets have now extended the range
to 500 °C. New quick opening designs
have been added to the Parr product
line that use O-rings for the seal and
normally limit the temperature to
225 °C (Viton®) or 300 °C (Kalrez®).
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Reactor Selection Guide
3
Confirm Standard Fittings
Pressure Gage, analog type,
which shows the pressure
within the vessel at all times.
Liquid Sampling Valve for
Thermocouple or Thermowell
withdrawing liquid samples
through the dip tube shared with
the gas inlet valve. Incoming gas
can be used to clear the dip tube
between liquid samples.
for measuring the temperature within the vessel. In small reactors, a thermocouple encased
in a metal sheath extends directly into the
vessel. In larger reactors, and in vessels
constructed of special alloys, the control
thermocouple is inserted into a thermowell
which extends to a point near the bottom of
the vessel.
Gas Release Valve to release
gas from the reactor during or
at the completion of a run.
Internal Stirring System
consists of a motor drive magnetically
coupled to an internal stirrer shaft with
attached turbine-type impeller(s).
Dip Tube
Cooling Coil
Safety Rupture Disc to
protect the vessel and the
operator from dangerous
pressures beyond the rated
limit for the vessel.
4
Gas Inlet Valve for charging gas
into the reactor. This valve and the
liquid sampling valve are connected
to a dip tube which extends to the
bottom of the vessel.
Guide or Foot Bearing with a PTFE bushing
to support and stabilize lower stirrer shaft. (Not
required with footless magnetic drive)
Specify Detailed Options
T
here are a number of options to be considered and
selections to be made in order to complete the specifications for a reactor. You will need to choose from the
following:
1. Sealing Style
Parr reactors may be provided with a flat gasket seal
or an O-ring seal. Most commonly, a flat PTFE gasket is
used. These are generally good for temperatures up to
350 °C. A graphite seal for temperatures up to 500 °C is
used for high temperature systems.
O-ring seals allow for a convenient, boltless closure,
but the material must be checked carefully against the
intended process as there are many solvents and gases
which attack O-rings.
2. Mounting Style
Parr reactors may be provided with a moveable vessel
mounting or fixed head mounting.
In the moveable vessel style the complete vessel
assembly (only the head in the one gallon or larger) is
removed from the heater for charging, product recovery,
and vessel cleaning.
In the fixed head style the head remains in the
mounting and the reactor heater then cylinder drop
away to open the vessel. This is useful for users who
wish to leave inlet and feed lines, discharge and vent
lines, condensers, and similar head connections undisturbed between runs. The head is easily removable if
desired by sliding the head out of its slot on the stand.
3. Support Stand
Parr stirred reactors are most commonly mounted on
a bench top stand for sizes of 2 liter or smaller. Vessels
1 liter or larger may be mounted on either moveable
carts or fixed floor stands. Care should be taken to check
stand dimensions with the available space at the user’s
facility.
4. Stirrer Type
Parr reactors have a magnetic drive equipped for
most low viscosity fluids and light slurries. Drives with
higher coupling torque and more powerful motors are
available for higher viscosity applications.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
26
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
Also, many reactors require a lower support bracket to
stabilize the stirring shaft. In applications with abrasive
particles or heavy mixing, a “footless” magnetic drive
with a larger diameter shaft may be provided.
5. Cooling Coil
An internal cooling coil can be installed in all reactors
(except the Micro sizes) to remove the heat of a reaction
and/or to cool the vessel at the end of a run. In some
reactors a cooling coil is furnished as a standard fitting.
In others, a coil can be added as an option in either
serpentine style or alternately in a spiral style for selected
models. For the micro sizes, with their limited dimensions, a cold finger may be added as an option
6. Gage and Rupture Disc Ranges
The pressure gage range must be selected to provide the resolution desired, while having a range high
enough to handle the maximum pressure the reactor will
undergo. One would be tempted to simply get a gage
with the largest range possible, but this can reduce the
resolution to unacceptable levels. One good rule of thumb
for good resolution is to operate with the gage at half of
its maximum range.
The rupture disc is most commonly matched to the
Maximum Allowable Working Pressure of the vessel,
ensuring the disc will burst before reaching a pressure
beyond the MAWP range. Care must be taken not to
take the vessel above 90% of its burst pressure under
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
s
2
normal operation. This will help protect the disc from the
effects of repeated pressure cycles.
7. Controller Options
Parr controllers are typically set up to control temperature, but may also be set up with digital pressure
displays, stirring speed, secondary temperature, and
other displays and controls.
These may be set up with data logging via PC as
well. For more information on these options, see the
Controller Section of this catalog.
8. Certification
ASME, CE, CHINA, and Parr Certifications are available
for users who require these recognized quality assurance
certifications.
9. Custom Options
A wide range of custom options such as special
openings in the head or cylinder, high viscosity stirrers,
windows, special valves, heaters or jackets, explosion
proof wiring, and volume modifications are available.
Various accessories, such as glass or PTFE liners,
condensers, catalyst holders, and alternate stirrers are
available to further adapt these reactors to the individual
user’s applications.
Detailed information for these and other options are
in Optional Fittings, Chapter 7, starting on page 107 of
this catalog.
How to use the Ordering Guide:
T
he last page of each Reactor Series in this chapter
is an Ordering Guide. A composite identification/
order number can be generated by combining the
individual symbols from the separate sections. Omit
symbol if not desired for system.
In the following example: Using the Ordering Guide
from the Series 4560 Stirred Reactors for our sample
order, we have chosen to order a 600 mL fixed head
reactor, FKM O-ring, the vessel manufactured out of
T316 Stainless Steel, a general purpose magnetic drive
also made of T316SS, 115V power supply, 1/4 hp
explosion-proof motor, 3000 psi pressure gage, no
bottom drain valve, and a 4848 controller.
The order number for that particular configuration
would appear as follows:
N o. 4568- OV - S S - M - 1 1 5 - X P . 2 5 - 3 0 0 0 - 4 8 4 8
A.
Model
No. 4568
C.
Gasket
-OV
D.
Material
-SS
E.
Stirrer
-M
F.
Drive MOC
-No Symbol
(same as vessel)
G.
Voltage
-115
H.
Motor
-XP.25
I.
Gage
-3000
L.
Controller
-4848
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
27
Series 4520 1 & 2 Liter General Purpose Reactor Systems
Series Number:
4520
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, mL:
1000-2000
970-1900 HP
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
2900 (200)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C, at
High Pressure (HP):
350 @ 2900 psi
Model 4523 Fixed Head Reactor open to show Internal Fittings, and a 4848 Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
hese are the largest of the
Parr Reactors that can be
handled on a bench top.
These reactors are available
with an FKM O-ring seal for
operating temperatures to
225 °C, and FFKM O-ring for
temperatures to 300 °C, or with
a flat, PTFE gasket for operating temperatures up to 350 °C
maximum.
An optional HP (High
Pressure) flat gasket version
has been added for maximum
allowable working pressure of
2900 psi (200 bar) at 350 °C.
Both fixed head and moveable
T
vessel designs are available.
An optional pneumatic lift is
available for the heavier 2 liter
cylinder and heater. It should be
noted, however, that the 2 liter,
fixed head model is tall and
may not be convenient to operate on a standard height bench
top. We recommend using a
floor stand. (See Series 4530)
With their larger diameter,
these mid-size reactors have
sufficient space for special
modifications, such as: an internal cooling coil, bottom drain
valve (not on 2 liter bench top),
ball valve for a solids charging
port, catalyst addition devices,
condensers, electrical feedthroughs and more. Details are
provided in the Chapter 6 of this
catalog, starting on page 93.
The standard magnetic stirrer drive on these 4520 Models
works well for reaction mixtures
with viscosities up to 25,000
centipoise. For heavier stirring
loads, these reactors can be
equipped with larger magnetic
drives, more powerful motors,
and drive trains capable of
delivering additional stirring
torque.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
28
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
29
t
o
r
Series 4520 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
4523
4524
4525
4526
Approximate Sizes, mL
1000
2000
1000
2000
Approximate Sizes for HP Models, mL
970
1900
970
1900
Model Number
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
HP Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
2900 psi (200 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Fixed Head
Moveable
Reactor Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
High Pressure Closure
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/8" Male NPT
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC6
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 6 blades
2 (2.28" dia., 2.00" dia. HP)
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-3000 psi (200 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
3/8" NPT
(1900psi/350 °C) 1000 mL
NA
1000
1500
Heater Style
1/4" NPT
(2900psi/350 °C) 970 mL
NA
Calrod
Heater Power, Watts
Stirrer Motor
1000
1500
1/8 hp variable speed
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
12 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
4.00
High Pressure Inside Diameter, inches
3.75
Inside Depth, inches
5.4
10.5
5.4
10.5
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
28
32
32
36
38*
48
100
115
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
17
Depth, inches
24
Height, inches
38*
48
Weight, pounds
105
120
Spare Parts Kit
4509M
* Stand height is 48-inches with Bottom Drain Valve option.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4520 1 & 2 Liter General Purpose Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
Model 4525 Reactor, 1000 mL, Moveable Vessel, and a 4848 Controller
shown with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
Model 4523 Bench Top Reactor, 1000 mL, Fixed Head Style.
4526 Moveable Vessel, 2000 mL
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
30
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
s
2
Com pany
31
c
t
o
r
Series 4520 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 452__-T-SS-M-115-VS.12-2000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4520 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4523
1000 mL
4524
2000 mL
4525
1000 mL
4526
2000 mL
High Pressure sizes are 970 mL & 1900 mL
Vessel Style
Fixed
Fixed
Moveable
Moveable
B High Pressure Option
-No Symbol
Standard Configuration (1900 psi / 131 bar)
-HP
2900 psi (200 bar)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Compression Gasket / 350 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2/B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-HD
Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-FMD1
Footless, General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD2
Footless, Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
F Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol
Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-VS .50*
Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
-XP .25
Explosion Proof, Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .50*
Explosion Proof, Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
-AM .50
Air Motor, 1/2 hp
* 230V Systems Only
I Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
J Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
K Bottom Drain Valve
Bottom Drain Valve, 3/8" NPT for standard systems,
-BDV
1/4” NPT for HP systems
L Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
(included in
Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with up
base system) to three additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six
additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
M 4848 Controller Options
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
N Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removable Baffle Set
-SB
Static Catalyst Basket
-DB
Dynamic Catalyst Basket
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater with Cooling Channels
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
O Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
P Spare Parts Kit
-4509M
Spare Parts Kit for 4520 Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4530 1 & 2 L General Purpose Reactor Systems
Series Number:
his series of reactors will
appeal to users who have any
of the following needs:
T
4530
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Floor Stand or Cart
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, mL:
1000-2000
970-1900 HP
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
2900 (200)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C, at
High Pressure (HP):
350 @ 2900 psi
• Reactors Configured for Polymer
Studies. The reactors in this series
are mounted on a sturdy floor
stand which will accommodate
larger stirrer drive motors and
stronger power trains that are
generally not available for the
bench top models. With these
options it is possible to provide
the high torque and low stirring
speeds required for work with
polymers and other mixtures with
viscosity of 1 million centipoise
and more. These mountings are
also better suited for the installation of a drain valve in the cylinder
bottom for convenient removal
of the reaction mixture while it is
still hot.
• Reactors Requiring Extensive
Modifications. Floor stand mountings provide a good base for
reactor modifications and for the
addition of accessories, such as:
condensers, packed columns,
special motors, special heaters,
jacketed vessels, automatic valves
or regulators, and many other
fittings. Both fixed head and moveable vessel designs are available.
An optional pneumatic lift is available for fixed head models
• Reactors that Need to be Moved.
These reactors are designed for
use in an area where a bench top
is not available. Users who wish to
move the reactor to storage when
not in use, will appreciate the movable cart design of the Series 4531
and 4532.
These reactors are available with
an FKM O-ring seal for operating
temperatures to 225 °C, and FFKM
O-ring for temperatures to 300
°C, or with a flat, PTFE gasket for
operating temperatures up to 350
°C maximum.
• HP versions. These reactors
are now available in an HP (High
Pressure) version up to 2900 psi
(200 bar) at 350 °C.
4534 Floor Stand Reactor, 2000 mL, Fixed Head, with Spiral Cooling Coil and Liquid
Charging Pipette, in the open position, and a 4848 Controller with optional Expansion
Modules.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
32
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
33
t
o
r
Series 4530 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
Sizes, mL
1000
2000
1000
2000
1000
2000
Sizes for HP Models, mL
970
1900
970
1900
970
1900
Model Number
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
HP Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
2900 psi (200 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Reactor Mounting
Closure
Moveable
Fixed Head
Moveable
Cart
Floor Stand
Floor Stand
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
High Pressure Closure
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/8" Male NPT
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 6-Blade
2 (2.28" dia., 2.00" dia. HP)
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-2000 psi (137 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine
1/4" NPT
(2900psi/350 °C) 970/1900 mL
3/8" NPT
(1900psi/350 °C) 1000/2000 mL
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
Heater Style
Calrod
Heater Power, Watts
1500
1000
Stirrer Motor
1000
1500
1000
1500
1/4 hp Variable Speed
Lift Mechanism
NA
Pneumatic Lift
NA
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
12 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
4.0
High Pressure Inside Diameter, inches
3.75
Inside Depth, inches
5.4
10.5
5.4
10.5
5.4
10.5
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
28
32
32
36
28
32
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
35
21
21
Depth, inches
18
28
28
Height, inches
Weight, pounds
Spare Parts Kit
50
200
63
215
225
63
240
225
240
4539M (General Purpose) or 4539MA (Heavy Duty)
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4530 1 & 2 L General Purpose Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
4532 Floor Stand Reactor, 2000 mL, Moveable Vessel on Cart,
and a 4848 Temperature Controller with optional Expansion
Modules.
4533 Reactor, 1000 mL Vessel with Gear
Drive, Dual Condenser and Spiral Stirrer.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
2000 mL Stirred Moveable Vessel
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
34
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
s
2
Com pany
35
c
t
o
r
Series 4530 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 453__-T-SS-M-115-VS.25-2000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4530 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4531
1000 mL
4532
2000 mL
4533
1000 mL
4534
2000 mL
4535
1000 mL
4536
2000 mL
Vessel Style
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Moveable Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Moveable Head, Stationary Floor Stand
B High Pressure Option
-No Symbol
Standard Configuration (1900 psi / 131 bar)
-HP
2900 psi (200 bar)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket / 350 °C
D Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-HD
Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-FMD1
Footless, General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD2
Footless, Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-FMD3
Footless, Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
F Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-VS .50
Variable Speed, 1/2 hp (230V Only)
-XP .25
Explosion Proof, Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .50
Explosion Proof, Var. Speed, 1/2 hp (230V Only)
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
-AM .50
Air Motor, 1/2 hp
-GDD
Geared Direct Drive (Fixed Head Only)
I Geared Direct Drive Ratio*
-3D
3:1, 0-600 rpm
-5D
5:1, 0-360 rpm
-10D
10:1, 0-180 rpm
* For -GDD Motor Option Only.
J Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
K Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
L Bottom Drain Valve
Bottom Drain Valve, 3/8” NPT for standard systems,
-BDV
1/4” NPT for HP systems
M Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
(included in
Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with up
base system) to three additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six
additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
N 4848 Controller Options
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
O Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removable Baffle Set
-SB
Static Catalyst Basket
-DB
Dynamic Catalyst Basket
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater with Cooling Channels
-PL
Pneumatic Lift
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
P Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Q Spare Parts Kit
-4539M
General Purpose Spare Parts Kit for 4530 Series
-4539MA
Heavy Duty Spare Parts Kit for 4530 Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4540 600-1200 mL High Pressure Reactor Systems
Series Number:
his series of stirred reactors has been designed
for users who need higher
operating pressures than the
2000 to 3000 psi offered by the
General Purpose Reactors, but
do not require the high operating temperatures provided by
the Series 4570 High Pressure,
High Temperature Reactors.
These reactors offer working
pressures to 5000 psi (345 bar)
at temperatures to 350 °C.
These vessels have been
designed with outside dimensions comparable to the Series
4520 and 4530 Reactors so that
they can use the same support
system, stirrer drive and heater
as these popular general purpose models. This provides not
only an attractively priced high
pressure/moderate temperature
system, but also reactors that
can be interchanged with the
1 and 2 liter sizes. The thicker
walls required for higher operating pressures reduce the
volumes of these reactors to
600 and 1200 mL.
These reactors can be used
in either the bench top or floor
stand mountings. While the
1200 mL reactor is offered as
a fixed head bench top model,
it is too tall and too heavy to
be handled comfortably on a
standard height bench top. It
is recommended that the floor
stand support option should
be selected unless the user has
an adjustable bench top which
will accommodate the overall
height of the 1200 mL systems.
T
4540
Type:
High Pressure
Stand:
Bench Top, Floor
Stand, or Cart
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, mL:
600 and 1200
High Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
5000 (345)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
Model 4544 High Pressure Reactor, 600 mL, Moveable Style Vessel, with heater
lowered, and a 4848 Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
36
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
s
2
Com pany
37
c
t
o
r
Series 4540 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
4544
4545
—
4547*
4544A
4545A
—
4547A*
4544C
4546C
Model No. - Fixed Head
Approximate Sizes, mL
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
Model No. - Moveable Vessel
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
5000 psi (345 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Details
Reactor Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Floor Stand
Moveable Cart
Split-Ring (8 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/4" Male NPT
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC6
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 6-Blade
2 (1.75" dia.)
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
5,000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine or Loop
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
1" NPS (Floor Stand Supports Only)
Heater Style
Calrod
Heater Power, Watts
Stirrer Motor, hp
1000
1500
1000
1500
1000
1500
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
12 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
3.25
Inside Depth, inches
4.7
9.8
4.7
9.8
4.7
9.8
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
51
57
51
57
51
57
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches
17
21
35
Depth, inches
24
28
18
Height, inches
38
48
Weight, pounds
125
135
Spare Parts Kit
4549MA
63
175
50
185
175
4549MB
185
4549MB
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
* Fixed head style only.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4540 600-1200 mL High Pressure Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
Model 4546C Reactor, 1200 mL, Moveable Head
Style, on a Moveable Cart, and a 4848 Reactor
Controller shown with optional Expansion
Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
1200 mL Fixed Head, and
600 mL Moveable Reaction Vessels.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
38
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
39
t
o
r
Series 4540 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 454__-T-SS-M-115-VS.12-2000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4540 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4544
600 mL
4544A
600 mL
4544C
600 mL
4545
600 mL
4545A
600 mL
4546
1200 mL
4546A
1200 mL
4546C
1200 mL
4547
1200 mL
4547A
1200 mL
Vessel Style
Moveable Head, Bench Top
Moveable Head, Floor Stand
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Fixed Head, Bench Top
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Moveable Head, Bench Top
Moveable Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Fixed Head, Bench Top
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket / 350 °C
C Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-NI
Nickel 200*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
*Maximum Pressure and/or Temperature are limited.
D Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD1
Footless, General Purpose, 16 in.-lb,
E Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC
Indicates Material of Construction
Symbol
F Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
G Motor
-VS .12
-VS .25
-XP .25
-AM .25
Option
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
Explosion Proof, Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
H Pressure Gage
-10000
10000 psi / 690 bar
-7500
7500 psi / 517 bar
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
I Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
J Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve, 1” NPS
K Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
(included in Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with up
base system) to three additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six
additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
L 4848 Controller Options
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
M Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-SP
Spiral Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater w/ Cooling Channels
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
N Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
O Spare Parts Kit
-4549MA
Spare Parts Kit for 4544-4547
-4549MB
Spare Parts Kit for 4544A-4547A, 4544C, 4546C
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4550 1 & 2 Gallon Reactor Systems
Series Number:
hese 4550 Reactors extend
the size range of the 4530
Series to 1 and 2 gallon (3.75
and 7.99 liter) sizes, providing
excellent facilities for pilot plant
studies.
These reactors are available
with an FKM O-ring seal for
operating temperatures to
225 °C, and FFKM O-ring for
temperatures to 300 °C, or with
a flat, PTFE gasket for operating temperatures up to 350 °C
maximum.
Both fixed head and
moveable head designs are
available. The moveable head,
Model 4551 and 4552, cart
reactors are designed so that
they can be opened or closed
conveniently without removing
the cylinder from the heater
and without auxiliary handling
equipment. The split-ring cover
clamp sections can be moved
into place from the sides, and
the cap screws can be tightened with the vessel in place
in its heater. The fixed head
versions, Model 4553 and 4554,
allow the head (and the connections made to it) to remain
in place while the cylinder and
heater are lowered with the aid
of the included pneumatic lift
system.
The 1 gallon size is usually recommended for high
viscosity polymer studies. An
optional bottom drain valve
may be added for convenient
product recovery. As with the
smaller floor stand models,
these larger, self- contained
systems can be equipped
with a variety of attachments,
such as: condensers, solids
charging port, bottom drain,
special motors, special heaters,
jacketed vessels and automatic
valves and regulators. Because
of the higher wattage heaters
for these reactors, all models
in the 4550 Series require a 230
volt power supply.
T
4550
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Floor Stand or Cart
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes,
Gallons (Liters):
1 (3.75) and 2 (7.99)
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
Model 4554 Reactor Fixed Head, Two Gallon Vessel, Pneumatic Lift, Hinged
Split Rings, opened to show Internal Fittings and Serpentine Cooling Coil, with
4848 Reactor Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
40
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
41
t
o
r
Series 4550 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4551
4552
4553
4554
Approximate Sizes, Gallon (Liter)
1 (3.75)
2 (7.99)
1 (3.75)
2 (7.99)
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Reactor Mounting
Closure
Moveable
Fixed Head
Cart
Floor Stand
Split-Ring (10 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/4" NPT Male
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1180HC
Maximum Torque
60 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 6-Blades
2 (3.85" dia.)
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-2000 psi (140 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
3/8" NPT
Heater Style
Calrod
Heater Power, Watts
2250
2700
Stirrer Motor
2250
2700
1/2 hp variable speed
Lift Mechanism
Pneumatic Lift
NA
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
230
Maximum Load, amps
13
15
13
15
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
6.0
Inside Depth, inches
8.6
17.2
8.6
17.2
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
95
120
115
140
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
35
20
Depth, inches
18
31
Height, inches
50
Weight, pounds
265
Spare Parts Kit
75
295
315
345
4559M
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4550 1 & 2 Gallon Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
The innovative Parr Hinged Split-Rings on the 4553 and 4554 add to a safe vessel removal routine. Simply
loosen the compression bolts, unlatch the split-ring closures, and pivot the split-rings out of the way.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
4551 Moveable Cart Stand Reactor, 1 Gallon, with
Bottom Drain Valve, and a 4848 Temperature Controller
shown with optional Expansion Modules.
4553 Floor Stand Reactor with Gear Drive,
Hinged Split Rings, and heater attached.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
42
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
43
t
o
r
Series 4550 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 455__-T-SS-HD-230-VS.50-2000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4550 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4551
1 Gallon
4552
2 Gallon
4553
1 Gallon
4554
2 Gallon
Vessel Style
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket / 350 °C
C Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
D Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-HD
Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-XHD
Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
-FMD2
Footless, Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-FMD3
Footless, Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
E Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC
Symbol
Indicate Material of Construction
F Electrical Supply
-230
230 VAC
G Motor
-VS .50
-XP .50
-AM .50
-VS .75
-GDD
Option
Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
Air Motor, 1/2 hp
Variable Speed, 3/4 hp
Geared Direct Drive (Fixed Head Units Only)
H Geared Direct Drive Ratio*
-3D
3:1, 0-600 rpm
-5D
5:1, 0-360 rpm
-10D
10:1, 0-180 rpm
* For Geared Direct Drive Motor Option Only.
I Pressure Gage
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
J Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
K Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve 3/8” NPT
L Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
(included in Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with up
base system) to three additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six additional display
modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
M 4848 Controller Options
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
N Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater w/ Cooling Channels
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
O Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Cerification
-P
Parr Certification
P Spare Parts Kit
-4559M
Spare Parts Kit for 4550 Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4555 2.6 & 5 Gallon Reactor Systems
Series Number:
he Model 4555 and 4557
Reactors with their 5 gallon
(18.75 L) capacity are the largest
stirred reactors offered by Parr.
The 4556 and 4558 Models are
similar units with a 10 liter (2.6
gal) volume which falls between
the larger 5 gallon design and
the smaller 1 and 2 gallon models in the 4550 Series. Vessel
styles are offered in a moveable
head or fixed head design.
These reactors are available
with an FKM O-ring seal for
operating temperatures to
225 °C, and FFKM O-ring for
temperatures to 300 °C, or with
a flat, PTFE gasket for operating temperatures up to 350 °C
maximum.
In the moveable head design,
the vessel is held in a support
system which minimizes the
physical effort required to
handle these heavy components. The hoist is attached to a
support column which provides
a convenient means for lifting
the head and cylinder out of the
stand. These components may
be transferred to the holding
position on the right side of the
stand. Vessels equipped with
a bottom drain valve will probably remain in the heater most
of the time, but can be lifted out
when necessary.
The fixed head support stand
features hinged split-rings that
4557 Floor Stand Reactor, Flexible Mantle Heater, with Split Rings and Pneumatic Lift.
swing to either side allowing
Below: Hinged Split Rings open revealing Serpentine Cooling Coil, with Heater and
the head to remain fixed to
Vessel lowered via Pneumatic Lift.
the stand while a pneumatic
lift allows the cylinder to be raised and lowered.
When lowered, the cylinder can be slid forward
for cleaning and servicing.
These reactors are generally used for pilot
plant or for custom chemical production purposes, usually with a variety of attachments
added to the basic units. Various heaters,
larger motors, heavier stirrer drives and remote
controls appropriate to the size of these reactors
have been designed and are available. Modified
versions of these units are available with
higher working pressures and temperatures.
T
4555
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Floor Stand
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes,
Gallons (Liters):
2.6 (10) and 5 (18.75)
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
44
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
s
2
Com pany
45
c
t
o
r
Series 4555 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4555
4556
4557
4558
Sizes, Gallon (Liter)
5 (18.75)
2.6 (10)
5 (18.75)
2.6 (10)
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Reactor Mounting
Closure
Moveable Head
Fixed Head
Table Floor Stand
Floor Stand
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
3/8" NPT Male
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1750HC
Maximum Torque
60 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 6-Blades
2 (5.25" dia.)
2 (3.85" dia.)
Pressure Gage, Size
2 (5.25" dia.)
2 (3.85" dia.)
4.5 inches
Range
0-2000 psi (140 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
1.0" NPT
Heater Style
Ceramic, 3-Zone
Heater Power, Watts
4500
Band Heater, 3-Zone
4250
Stirrer Motor
5500
3300
3/4 hp variable speed
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
230-1P or 400-415V 3-Phase “Y”
Maximum Load
1P-30 amps or 3P-15 amps/leg
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
Inside Depth, inches
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
9.5
7.75
9.5
7.75
16.25
12.2
16.25
12.2
375
250
375
250
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
63
Depth, inches
25
Height, inches
91
Weight, pounds
Spare Parts Kit
31
43
95
1000
900
87
1000
4559PCM
900
4559PDM
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Because of considerable power requirements for a unit this
size, 3-phase power is typical. Single phase 230 VAC is also possible, but requires a power source capable of supplying over 40
amps, well beyond the limits of most laboratory power supplies.
Users are advised to have a qualified electrician install a suit-
able 3-phase “Y” power supply. Parr Technical Support will
be happy to assist with electrical specifications.
Systems with lower electrical requirements such as jacketed systems or lower wattage mantle heaters may be able
to use single phase effectively.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4555 10 & 20 Liter Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
4556 Table Floor Stand Reactor, 10 Liter Moveable Vessel, Electric Hoist, and a 4848
Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
10 Liter Stirred Vessel removed from heater.
Model 4556 Reactor, 10 Liter Vessel, with
head removed.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
46
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
s
2
Series 4555 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 455__-T-SS-HD-230-VS.75-2000-SC-C3-4848-ASME
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4555 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4555
5 Gallon
4556
10 Liter
4557
5 Gallon
4558
10 Liter
Vessel Style
Moveable Head
Moveable Head
Fixed Head
Fixed Head
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket / 350 °C
C Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
D Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-HD
Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
-XHD
Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
-FMD2
Footless Magnetic Drive, 60 in-lb
-FMD3
Footless Magnetic Drive, 120 in-lb
E Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol Indicate Material of Construction
F Electrical Supply
-230
230 VAC, Single Phase
-400
400-415V 3-Phase “Y”
G Motor Option
-VS .75
Variable Speed, 3/4 hp
-XP .75
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 3/4 hp
-AM .100
Air Motor, 1 hp
-GDD
Geared Direct Drive (Fixed Head Only)
H
H Geared Direct Drive Ratio*
-3D
3:1, 0-600 rpm
-5D
5:1, 0-360 rpm
-10D
10:1, 0-180 rpm
* for -GDD Motor Option Only
J Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
K Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve, 1” NPT
I Pressure Gage
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
L Heater
-C3
-B3
-WJ
-MH
Options
Ceramic, 3-Zone (4555/4556)
Band Heaters, 3-Zone
Welded Jacket
Flexible Mantle Heater, 1-zone, 2500 W, 200 °C Max.
M Head Lift Mechanism (Table Floor Stand only)
-EH
Electric Hoist (115 VAC)
N Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed Control,
(included in and Data logging with Software. For use with up to three
base system) additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six additional display
modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
O 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
P Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
Q Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
R Spare Parts Kit
-4559PCM
Spare Parts Kit for 4555 and 4557
-4559PDM
Spare Parts Kit for 4556 and 4558
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
47
Series 4560 Mini Reactor Systems
Series Number:
4560
Type:
Mini
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Sizes, mL:
100 - 600
Standard Temperature
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
High Temperature (HT)
MAWP Rating
psi (bar):
2000 (138)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Temperature (HT)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
500 w/ FG Flat Gasket
hese are the most popular
of all Parr Stirred Reactors.
Although they are called “Mini”
reactors, they offer a range of
sizes large enough to work with
significant sample sizes, yet
small enough to be handled
with ease by all operators.
They are made in both fixed
head and moveable vessel
styles and are available with an
FKM O-ring seal for operating
temperatures to 225 °C, and
FFKM O-ring for temperatures
to 300 °C, or with a flat, PTFE
gasket for operating temperatures up to 350 °C maximum.
Choosing the high temperature option (HT) boosts the
maximum temperature to 500
°C, but de-rates the MAWP to
2000 psi (138 bar). Standard
Mini reactors can be converted
to high temperature reactors
(500 °C max temperature and
2000 psi MAWP) by changing
the head assembly (contains
cone connections, high temperature valves, and graphoil
gasket) replacing the heater
with a ceramic fiber heater and
replacing the split ring. Contact
Parr Instrument Company for
details.
Although internal and external space is limited in these
small vessels, gas entrainment
impellers, catalyst baskets,
condensers and other options
are available. All reactors in
this series can also be easily
converted from one size to
another by simply substituting
a longer or shorter cylinder
with the corresponding internal
fittings and heaters.
The support system for
these Mini Reactors is designed
specifically to provide stability
at stirring speeds up to 1700
rpm, in a compact mounting
small enough to fit into a
laboratory hood. The support
system can also be adapted
to accept any of the smaller
vessels from the 4590 Micro
Reactor Series.
T
4566 Mini Reactor, 300 mL, Fixed Head, Quick-release Split Ring, and a 4848 Controller
shown with optional Expansion Modules.
4566 with Aluminum Block Heater, Bottom Drain Valve, and a 4848 Controller shown
with optional Expansion Modules.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
48
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
s
2
Series 4560 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Sizes, mL
4561
4562
4563
4564
300
450
600
160
4565
4566
4567
100
300
450
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
3000 psi (200 bar)
HT Max. Pressure (MAWP)
2000 psi (138 bar)
4568 4566B 4566C
600
160
100
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with FG Flat Gasket (HT)
500 °C
Vessel Style
NA
500 °C
Moveable
NA
Fixed Head
Reactor Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/8" NPT Male
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC6
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s), 4-Blade, 1.38" dia.
1
1
2
1
1
Pressure Gage, Size
1
1
2
1
1
3.5 inches
Range, Standard Temp.
0-3000 psi (200 bar)
Range, High Temperature
0-2000 psi (137 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Fixed Thermocouple (Thermowell for special alloys)
Cooling Coil
Included
Not Included
Style
Included
Not Included
Single Loop (Optional Serpentine Style)
Bottom Drain Valve
1/4" NPT (Not available on HT Models.)
Heater Style
Mantle
Heater Power, Watts
510
Heater Style w/ HT Option
590
Clamp-on
780
Ceramic Fiber
Heater Power, Watts
800
800
Mantle
500
510
N/A
1100
780
500
Ceramic Fiber
—
Stirrer Motor
Clamp-on
590
800
N/A
800
1100
—
1/8 hp variable speed
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
10 / 5 (14 / 7 High Temperature)
Cylinder Dimensions
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
Inside Depth, inches
Inside Diameter, inches
4
6
8
2
2
4
6
8
2
2
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
10
13
16
8
9
12
15
18
8
9
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
12
Depth, inches
18
Height, inches*
28
32
36
28
28
28
32
36
28
28
Weight, pounds w/ Controller
60
63
66
60
60
62
65
68
60
60
Spare Parts Kit
4569M
* Height increases 4-inches with the Bottom Drain Valve option.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
49
Series 4560 Mini Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
Model 4563 Mini Reactor, 600 mL, Moveable Vessel, PTFE Flat Gasket Seal, with vessel
disassembled, and a 4848 Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
4560 Reactor Vessels from left to right, 300 mL, 100 mL, 450 mL, 160 mL, and 600 mL.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
50
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
51
t
o
r
Series 4560 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 456__-T-SS-M-115-VS.12-2000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4560 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
Vessel Style
4561
300 mL
Moveable Head
4562
450 mL
Moveable Head
4563
600 mL
Moveable Head
4564
160 mL*
Moveable Head
4565
100 mL *
Moveable Head
4566
300 mL
Fixed Head
4567
450 mL
Fixed Head
4568
600 mL
Fixed Head
4566B
160 mL*
Fixed Head
4566C
100 mL*
Fixed Head
* High temperature option not available.
J Internal Cooling Coil
-CL
Internal Cooling Loop
B High Temperature Option
-No Symbol
Standard Configuration: 3000 psi / 200 bar
-HT
2000 psi / 138 bar @ 500 °C
M 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
-A1925E4
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller (required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Compression Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite Gasket / 500 °C
D Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400*
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3*
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20*
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
* Not available for HT option
E Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD1
Footless, 16 in-lb
F Stirrer Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .25
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
I Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
-200
-100
K Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve (Not Available on High Temperature Vessels)
L Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed Control,
(included in
and Data logging with Software. For use with up to three additional
base system) display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
N Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-SB
Static Catalyst Basket
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater w/ Cooling Channels
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
O Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
P Spare Parts Kit
-4569M
Spare Parts Kit for 4560 Series
-4569HT
Spare Parts Kit for 4560HT Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
600 psi / 14 bar
200 psi / 40 bar
100 psi / 7 bar
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4570/80 High Temperature/High Pressure Reactor Systems
Series Number:
4570/80
Type:
High Temperature
High Pressure
Stand:
Bench Top,
Floor Stand or
Cart
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, mL:
250-5500
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200) 4580
5000 (345) 4570
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
500 w/ FG Flat Gasket
arr offers a number of different reactors in the 4570
and 4580 Series in a variety of
sizes and with different mountings for operating pressures to
5000 psi (345 bar) and temperatures to 500 °C.
P
4571 - 4572 Reactors
These are 1000 and 1800
mL moveable head reactors
mounted in movable carts.
4577 - 4578 Reactors
These are 1000 and 1800 mL
fixed head reactors mounted
on a floor stand with pneumatic lift.
4575 - 4576A Reactors
These are 500 and 250 mL
bench top reactors with 5000
psi (345 bar) and 500 °C ratings. They are available as
either moveable or fixed head
vessels.
4581 - 4582 Reactors
These 1 gallon (3.75 L) and
1.5 gallon (5.5 L) reactors are
designed for 3000 psi (200 bar)
maximum pressure with a 500
°C maximum working temperature and mounted on movable
carts.
4583 - 4584 Reactors
These are 1 gallon (3.75 L) and
1.5 gallon (5.5 L) fixed head
reactors mounted on floor
stands with pneumatic lift.
All of these reactors have
been designed with suitable
valves, fittings and modifications to the vessel itself to
operate at the higher temperature and pressure ratings.
Flat, flexible graphite (FG)
gaskets are used for temperatures in the higher range to 500
°C. These can be replaced with
PTFE gaskets for procedures in
which the temperature will not
exceed 350 °C.
Model 4577 High Temperature/High Pressure Reactor, Floor Stand, Fixed Head
1000 mL with Heater and Pneumatic Lift.
The Series 4570/80 High Temperature/High Pressure Reactors come in three
configurations, from left to right: Bench Top (250 & 500 mL Only), Floor Stand, and Cart.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
52
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
s
2
Com pany
53
c
t
o
r
Series 4570/80 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model No. – Moveable Vessel
Model No. – Fixed Head
Reactor Mounting
4571
4577
4572
4578
Cart / Floor Stand
Sizes, mL
1000
Maximum Pressure, MAWP
1800
5000 psi (345 bar)
4581
4583
4582
4584
4575B
4575A
Cart / Floor Stand
3750
4576B
4576A
Bench Top
5500
500
3000 psi (200 bar)
250
5000 psi (345 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FG Flat Gasket
500 °C
Vessel Details
Closure (Compression Bolts)
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts
for Flat Gasket, no Compression
Bolts for O-ring)
Split-Ring (16 Compression Bolts
for Flat Gasket, no Compression
Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
Split-Ring (8 Compression Bolts
for Flat Gasket, no Compression
Bolts for O-ring)
1/4" NPT Female
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
Maximum Torque
A1120HC
A1180HC
A1120HC
16 Inch-Pounds
60 Inch-Pounds
16 Inch-Pounds
2 (2" dia.)
2 (3.5" dia.)
2 (.81/1.38" dia.)
Impeller(s), 6-Blade (4-blade)
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-5000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil
Included
Style
Serpentine
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve
Single Loop
1" NPS (Floor stand supports only)
Heater Style
Ceramic: Fixed Head, Calrod: Removeable
Heater Power, Watts
Stirrer Motor, Variable Speed
Ceramic
2800
2800
1400 at 115 Volts
1/4 hp
1/2 hp
1/8 hp
230
230
115 or 230
15
15 / 9
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
15
15
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
3.75
Inside Depth, inches
6.2
5.5
10.5
9.7
2.5
15
6.6
3.2
Weight of Moveable Vessel, pounds
70
85
100
130
35
29
Weight of Fixed Vessel, pounds
85
100
120
160
37
31
Reactor Dimensions
Moveable Width x Depth x Height, in.
Fixed Width x Depth x Height, in.
Cart: 35 x 18 x 50
Cart: 35 x 18 x 50
Floor Stand: 20 x 31 x 75
Floor Stand: 20 x 31 x 75
Moveable Weight w/Controller, pounds
245
Fixed Weight w/Controller, pounds
265
Spare Parts Kit
4579B
265
325
285
345
Bench Top: 17 x 24 x 42
355
125
375
127
4589B
120
122
4579D
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4570/80 High Temperature/High Pressure Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
Model 4581 High Temperature/High Pressure Reactor, with One Gallon Moveable
Vessel, and a 4848 Reactor Controller with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
Model 4575B High Pressure/High
Temperature 500 mL Moveable
Vessel Assembly.
Model 4576A HT/HP Reactor, Fixed Head Bench Top, with
250 mL Vessel.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
54
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
s
2
Series 4570/80 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 457__ or 458__-FG-M or HD-SS-115 or 230-VS.__-5000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4570 or 4580 Series Reactor
can be developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model
Size
4571
1000 mL
4572
1800 mL
4575B
500 mL
4576B
250 mL
4575A
500 mL
4576A
250 mL
4577
1000 mL
4578
1800 mL
Vessel Style
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Moveable Head, Bench Top
Moveable Head, Bench Top
Fixed Head, Bench Top
Fixed Head, Bench Top
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
4581
4582
4583
4584
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Moveable Head, Moveable Cart
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
Fixed Head, Stationary Floor Stand
1.0 Gallon
1.5 Gallon
1.0 Gallon
1.5 Gallon
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-FG
Flexible Graphite Gasket, 500 °C
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket, 350 °C
C Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400*
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3*
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20*
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
*Maximum temperature and/or pressure limited.
D Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD
Footless, General Purpose, 16 in-lb
E Magnetic
-M
-HD
-XHD
-FMD1
-FMD2
-FMD3
Stirrer Drive for 4571-4584 Only
General Purpose , 16 in-lb
Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
Footless, 16 in-lb.
Footless, Heavy Duty, 60 in-lb
Footless, Extra Heavy Duty, 120 in-lb
F Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol
Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC (4575-4576 Only)
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp (4575-4576 Only)
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-VS .50*
Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
-XP .25
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .50*
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/2 hp
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp (4575-4576 Only)
-AM .50*
Air Motor, 1/2 hp
-GDD
Geared Direct Drive (Fixed Head Unit Only)
* For use with -HD Magnetic Stirrer Drive. Only available on 230V systems.
I Pressure Gage
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
J Bottom Drain Valve
Bottom Drain Valve (Not available
-BDV
on 250 mL or Bench Top Systems.)
K Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed Control,
(included in
and Data logging with Software. For use with up to three additional
base system) display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
L 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
-A1925E4
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller (required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
M Custom Options (List All Desired)
-AS
Anchor Stirrer
-PS
Paddle Stirrer
-SA
Spiral Stirrer
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-SB
Static Catalyst Basket
-DB
Dynamic Catalyst Basket
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
N Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
O Spare Parts Kit
-4579B
Spare Parts Kit for 4571, 4572, 4577, 4578
-4579D
Spare Parts Kit for 4575A, 4576A, 4575B, 4576B
-4589D
Spare Parts Kit for 4581, 4582, 4583, 4584
Please note that all options and combinations are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
55
Series 4590 Micro Reactor Systems
Series Number:
4590
Type:
Micro
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Sizes, mL:
25, 50, 100
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
5000 (345)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Temperature (HT) /
High Pressure (HP)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
500 w/ FG Flat Gasket
(Fixed Head Only)
hese are the smallest of
all Parr Stirred Reactors.
They will be a good choice for
chemists working with very
expensive materials or materials only available in small
amounts. They will also appeal
to users who wish to minimize
the risks associated with hazardous materials or reactions
by restricting the reactants or
products to a minimum. Use of
the Series 4590 Reactors also
helps minimize the quantities
of waste products which may
require special disposal procedures. The 4590 systems are
now available in high pressure
(5000 psi) or high pressure/
high temperature (500 °C)
versions.
These micro reactors have
been designed to provide as
many of the features of the
larger vessels as possible in
the limited space available. All
of the standard head fittings
are provided, with optional
cooling now available with
aluminum block heaters with
cooling capability, welded
jackets or Cold Fingers.
These systems are offered
in both fixed head and moveable head vessel styles with
choices of a self sealing FKM
O-ring for temperatures up to
225 °C or with FFKM O-ring
for temperatures to 300 °C
or with a flat PTFE gasket for
temperatures to 350 °C, or
with an FG Flexible Graphite
gasket for temperatures to 500
°C with the HP/HT option (for
fixed head versions only). A
split ring closure is standard.
All three volumes use the
same ceramic fiber heater.
T
4598 Micro Reactor, Fixed Head, 100 mL HP/HT Vessel
These micro reactors can be
easily converted from one size
to another by simply substituting a larger or smaller cylinder
and the corresponding internal
fittings. The support system
can also be readily adapted to
accept any of the vessels from
the 4560 Mini Reactor Series.
The opportunity to modify these
small reactors is restricted
because of the limited head
space available.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
56
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
57
t
o
r
Series 4590 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Sizes, mL
4591
4592
4593
4596
4597
4598
25
50
100
25
50
100
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
3000 psi (200 bar)
HP, HP/HT Max. Pressure (MAWP)
5000 psi (345 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with FG Flexible Graphite,
Flat Gasket (HP/HT)
500 °C
Vessel Style
Moveable
Fixed Head
Reactor Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Cap Screws)
Valve Connections
1/8" NPT Male, 1/4" NPT Male for HP, 1/4" NPT Female for HP/HT
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC6
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller, 4-Blade
1 (.81" dia.)
Pressure Gage, Size
3.5 inches
Range
0-3000 psi (200 bar), 0-5000 psi (345 bar) HP, HP/HT
Temperature Measurement
Fixed Thermocouple (Thermowell for special alloys)
Cold Finger
Optional
Bottom Drain Valve
N/A
Heater Style
Ceramic Fiber Heater
Heater Power, Watts
700
Stirrer Motor
1/8 hp Variable Speed
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
7/4
7/4
Maximum Load, amps, HP/HT, 115 / 230
NA
7/4
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1.0
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.3
1.3
Inside Depth, inches
2.0
2.3
4.6
2.0
2.3
4.6
7
7
8
7
7
8
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
12
Depth, inches
18
Height, inches*
Weight, pounds
Spare Parts Kit
27
55
35
55
27
56
56
35
56
57
4599M
* Add 8" to height for Aluminum Block Heater.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4590 Micro Reactor Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
9
Materials of Construction
10
Magnetic Drive
14
Gaskets & Seals
18
Stirrer Motor
110
Rupture Disc
116
Pressure Gage
117
Cooling Coil
121
Bottom Drain Valve
122
4848 Reactor Controller
96
4871 Process Controller
101
A2110E Motor Controller
106
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Stirrers
112
Heaters
108
External Valves and Fittings
123
Solids Charging Ports
120
Condensers
115
Electrical Glands
128
Catalyst Addition Device
120
Catalyst Baskets
114
Relief Valves
117
Windows
127
Gear Drives
111
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
125
Sample Collection Device
122
Model 4598 Reactor, 100 mL Fixed Head Vessel, with PTFE Compression Gasket, and Split Ring Closure,
Mantle Heater, shown with a 4848 Reactor Controller with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES
Liners
121
Spare Parts Kits
128
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Burettes
119
Model 4593 100 ml stirred vessel.
Model 4597 100 ml HP/HT stirred vessel.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
58
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
59
t
o
r
Series 4590 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 459__-T-SS-M-115-VS.12-3000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4590 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model
Size
4591
25 mL
4592
50 mL
4593
100 mL
4596
25 mL
4597
50 mL
4598
100 mL
Vessel Style
Moveable Head
Moveable Head
Moveable Head
Fixed Head
Fixed Head
Fixed Head
B Temperature / Pressure Options
-No Symbol
3000 psi (345 bar) @ 350 °C
-HP
5000 psi (345 bar) @ 350 °C
-HP/HT*
5000 psi (345 bar) @ 500 °C
* Fixed Head Only
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite / 500 °C (HP/HT option only)
D Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400*
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2/B-3*
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20*
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
* Maximum temperature and/or pressure limited.
E Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose Magnetic
F Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .25
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
ATEX
Explosion Proof Variable Speed
-XP .25X
(.18 KW, 0-1300 rpm)
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
I Pressure Gage
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
J Controller
-4848
(included in
base system)
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed Control,
and Data logging with Software. For use with up to three additional
display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
K 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
-A1925E4
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller (required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
L Custom Options (List All Desired)
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
-ABH
Aluminum Block Heater with Cooling Channels
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
M Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
N Spare Parts Kit
-4599
Spare Parts Kit for 4590 Series
-4599HPHT
Spare Parts Kit for 4590HPHT Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5100 Low Pressure Reactors
with high temperature cushions
so the glass vessel does not
come in direct contact with the
metal split ring. Six sealing
screws are tightened only finger
tight to develop the seal on
the O-ring. The split ring snaps
together with latches to provide
a secure and positive closure.
The alternate metal cylinders use a different split ring
designed to handle the higher
working pressure of the metal
vessels.
Series Number:
5100
Type:
Glass or Metal
Bench Top
Vessel:
Fixed Head
Sizes, mL:
160 mL - 1.5 L
Maximum Operating
Pressure, psi (bar):
Glass:
150 psi (10 bar)
5111 Bench Top Reactor, 1000 mL, Fixed Head, Glass Jacketed Vessel.
Metal:
1000 psi (69 bar)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
225 (Glass)
300 (Metal)
he Parr series 5100 Low Pressure Reactors
offer:
1. A system for running reactions similar
to those that have been conducted for
many years in the Parr Shaker, but which
offer stirring for better scalability, higher
operating temperatures and pressures,
and more extensive reactor controls and
instrumentation.
2. Glass vessels that permit direct observation of mixing action, color changes, or
changes of state.
3. Reactors designed for convenient
operation at moderate pressure and/or for
corrosion resistance.
T
Convenient and Easy Sealing with O-rings
and Split Ring Closures
Parr has developed an O-ring and closure
system to accommodate the requirements of this
unique glass-to-metal seal and support, which is
convenient to use. A face seal-type O-ring design
is used with the proven and popular Parr split
ring closure. For this application a special gasket
groove was designed to retain the O-ring on
the head of the reactor when it is opened. A full
range of O-ring materials is available for chemical compatibility with reactants, products and
solvents.
The split ring for the glass vessel is padded
•
•
•
•
Standard Reactor Fittings
The head of each glass reactor
is equipped with:
• Pressure gage, 3-1/2 inch diameter, calibrated
0-200 psi and 0-14 bar
• Gas release valve
• Gas inlet valve
• Liquid sampling valve
• Internal thermocouple
• Internal cooling loop – standard
300 mL to 1.5 L
Internal stirrer with magnetic drive
Heads intended for use with glass cylinders
are equipped with spring-loaded relief valves
adjustable between 50-150 psi.
All heads are equipped with a rupture disc
rated for 1000 psi.
Internal fittings are T316 Stainless Steel with
optional PTFE coating.
Materials of Construction
These reactors are a combination of a glass
reaction vessel with a metal head, internal stirrer,
dip tube, thermowell, cooling loop, and external
valves and fittings, or alternately an all metal
system.
The standard material of construction for the
head is Type 316 Stainless Steel with PTFE coated
T316SS internals. As an alternative the head and
internal wetted parts can be provided in any of
the standard Parr materials of construction. See
the 5100 Ordering Guide.
Size
Series 5100 Reactors can be easily converted
between the 160, 300, 450, and 600 mL sizes by
simply changing the cylinders and internal parts.
In a similar manner, 1 L and 1.5 L are interchangeable. While the 160-600 mL stand cannot be
converted to hold 1 and 1.5 L vessels, the larger
stand can be converted to accommodate the 160-
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
60
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
Split Ring for Glass Reactors.
Split Ring for Metal Reactors.
600 mL vessels. If you plan to convert at a later
time, be sure to order the stand for the largest
size you plan to use so the shield and supports
will not have to be replaced.
5110 Conversion Sets: Glass to Metal or
Metal to Glass
Heating and Temperature Control
These reactors are available with either
jacketed or non-jacketed glass or metal cylinders
allowing for heating by either a user supplied
circulator or with a removable heating mantle
respectively. While we would normally expect
glass vessels to be equipped with circulating
jackets to maintain their transparent feature,
some users may not need to heat their reactions
or may prefer to use removable heating mantles
when they need to work at elevated temperatures. Although transparency is not an issue with
metal vessels, users will generally want to select
the same heating method for metal vessels as
they use for glass vessels so they can utilize the
same heating and control system for both.
Users who are using a circulating bath that
has its own temperature control for use with
these reactors will want to order the reactor
without a heating mantle and may only need a
motor controller for stirring speed to complete
the system. Most laboratory circulators should
be adequate for these small vessels. Moveable
electric heating mantles are available for vessels
that do not have attached circulating jackets.
These mantles are for use with 115 or 230 VAC.
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
61
t
o
r
Series 5100 Reactors can be easily converted
between glass and metal cylinders. The conversion sets include the cylinder, closure, gage
and safety relief devices for the “converted to”
system. Sets do not include heater.
5110 & 5120 Conversion Sets
Glass to Metal
Catalog
Number
Size
mL
Converts
From
Converts
To
5110A
5110B
5110C
5110D
5110E
5110F
5110M
5110N
5120A
5120B
5120C
5120D
300
300
450
450
600
600
215
160
1000
1000
1500
1500
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal to Glass
Catalog
Number
Size
mL
Converts
From
Converts
To
5110G
5110H
5110I
5110J
5110K
5110L
5110P
5110Q
5120E
5120F
5120G
5120H
300
300
450
450
600
600
215
160
1000
1000
1500
1500
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Metal Jacketed
Metal
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Glass Jacketed
Glass
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5100 Low Pressure Reactors
Series 5100 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Sizes, mL
5101
5102
5103
5104
5111
5112
300
450
600
160
1000
1500
Maximum Pressure, Glass
150 psi (10 bar)
Maximum Pressure, Metal
1000 psi (69 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring, Glass Vessel
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring, Metal Vessel
300 °C
Vessel Style
Fixed Head
Reactor Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Glass Vessels: 6 Thumb Screws, Metal Vessels: Split-Rings (6 Compression Bolts)
Valve Connections
1/8" Male NPT
Magnetic Stirrer, Model No.
A1120HC9
Maximum Torque
16 Inch-Pounds
Impeller(s)
1
2
2
1
Pressure Gage, Size
3.5 inches
Range, Glass
0-200 psi (0-14 bar)
Range, Metal
2
2
0-1000 psi (0-65 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Fixed, Type J, Thermocouple
Cooling Coil
Included
None
Style
Single Loop
Heater Style
Mantle
Included
Heater Power Glass, Watts
510
590
780
400
400
550
Heater Power Metal, Watts
510
590
780
400
450
650
Stirrer Motor
1/8 hp Variable Speed
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
9/5
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
2.5
4
4
6.0
8.0
Inside Depth, inches
4.0
6.0
8.0
2.0
Weight of Cylinder, Glass, pounds
0.75
1.1
1.25
0.75
3
5
Weight of Cylinder, Metal, pounds
3
5
7
3
9
13
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
17
21
Depth, inches
24
26
Height, inches
30
33
Weight, pounds
60
Spare Parts Kit
63
66
60
109
5109M
113
5119M
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
62
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
63
t
o
r
Series 5100 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 51___-G-SS-4B-115-VS.12-200
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 5100 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model
Size
5101
300 mL
5102
450 mL
5103
600 mL
5104
160 mL (215 mL Glass Jacketed)
5111
1000 mL
5112
1500 mL
B Cylinder
-GL
-G
-MJ
-M
C Gasket
-OV
-OK
Type
Glass Jacketed
Glass
Metal Jacketed
Metal
FKM O-ring
FFKM O-ring
D Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose, 16 in-lb
-FMD1
Footless, General Purpose, 16 in-lb
F Mag. Drive Material of Construction
-MOC Symbol
Indicate Material of Construction
G Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
H Motor Option
-VS .12
Variable Speed, 1/8 hp
-VS .25
Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-XP .25
Explosion Proof Variable Speed, 1/4 hp
-AM .25
Air Motor, 1/4 hp
I Pressure
-200
-100
-1000
J Heater
-MH
-NH
K Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with
up to three additional display modules
-4848B
Same as 4848 but with up to six additional modules
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
L 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
M Custom Options (List All Desired)
-PS
Paddle Stirrer, 300 mL and Larger
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-4B
4-Bladed Stirrer Impeller, 160-600 mL
-6B
6-Bladed Stirrer Impeller, 1000-1500 mL
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
N Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
O Spare Parts Kit
-5109M
Spare Parts Kit for Models 5101, 5102, 5103, 5104
-5119M
Spare Parts Kit for Models 5111 and 5112
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
Gage
200 psi / 14 bar
100 psi / 7 bar
1000 psi / 70 bar (Metal Vessels Only)
Mantle (Non-Jacketed Vessels Only)
No Heater
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5500 High Pressure Compact Laboratory Reactors
Series Number:
5500
Type:
High Pressure
Compact
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable
Sizes, mL:
25-600
Standard Pressure
MAWP, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
Parr Series 5500 HPCL Reactor and a 4848 Reactor Controller shown with optional Expansion Modules.
Familiar Parr Designs
ll of the safety, convenience and reliability
features which have been the hallmark of
Parr pressure reaction equipment for more than
50 years have been incorporated into a new line
of high pressure, compact laboratory reactors.
(HPCL Reactors.)
The Series 5500 HPCL Reactors are based
upon our popular micro and mini, Series 4590
& 4560 Reactors. There are several differences
between these new reactors and their original
counterparts. Primarily, these are:
1. A smaller, more compact magnetic drive
is installed.
2. A smaller, more compact variable speed
stirrer motor.
3. The larger support stand, overarm and
motor have been eliminated.
4. An Aluminum Block Heater also serves as
the support stand.
A
As a result of these changes, we are now able
to offer these new reactors to users who do not
require the wide variety of options and expandability provided by our Series 4500 Reactors at
a significantly lower cost. These new designs
will be welcomed by not only investigators with
limited space or budgets, but also by investigators building multiple reactor installations for
combinatorial chemistry or high throughput
investigations.
The reaction vessels used in these new HPCL
reactors are identical to the ones furnished in the
Series 4590 Micro and Series 4560 Mini Reactors.
HPCL Reactors use the popular Parr split ring
closure. These vessels are rated for a maximum
working pressure of 3000 psi. The maximum
operating temperature is dependent upon the
seal selected, PTFE gasket for up to 350 °C; with
FKM O-ring to 225 °C or FFKM O-ring to 300 °C.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
64
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
R
e
a
c
s
2
Com pany
65
t
o
r
Series 5500 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Sizes, mL
5511
5512
5513
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
25
50
100
300
450
600
160
100
Maximum Pressure
3000 psi (200 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Moveable
Reactor Mounting
Compact Bench Top
Closure
Split Ring (6 Cap Screws for Flat Gasket) (0 Cap Screws for Quick Close)
Valve Connections
1/8" Male NPT
Maximum Torque, Inch-Pounds
2.5 (0.28 Nm)
Impeller(s), 4-blade
1 (0.81" dia.)
1 (0.81" dia.)
Pressure Gage, Size
2 (1.38" dia.)
1 (0.81" dia.)
3.5 inches
Range
0-3000 psi (200 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Fixed Thermocouple
Cooling Coil
Optional Cooling Coil
NA
Standard Single Loop
NA
Coldfinger
NA
Spiral
Bottom Drain Valve
NA
Heater Style
Aluminum Block (External Cooling Optional)
Heater Power, Watts
700
1000
700
Stirrer Motor, Variable Speed
1000
700
10 / 5
8/4
1/17 hp
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
8/4
10 / 5
8/4
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1
1.3
1.3
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2
Inside Depth, inches
2
2.25
4.5
4
6
8
2
2
Weight of Cylinder, pounds
12
12
12
13
15
17
12
12
25
27
23
23
28
30
25
25
Reactor Dimensions
Width, inches w/o Controller
8.3
Depth, inches
9.5
Height, inches
23
23
25
23
Weight, pounds
25
25
25
26
Spare Parts Kit
5529SPK
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Heater / Reactor Support
A heater also serves as the vessel support for
the HPCL Reactors. This is an aluminum block
style heater for excellent thermal uniformity. The
cartridge heaters used in this heating block are
easily replaced if required. A stainless steel heat
shield is provided around the heating block. This
style of heater/reactor support provides a very
small footprint, ideal for limited bench space.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5500 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 55___-T-SS-115-VS-M-3000-4848
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 5500 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
5511
25 mL
5512
50 mL
5513
100 mL
5521
300 mL
5522
450 mL
5523
600 mL
5524
160 mL
5525
100 mL
Cylinder, I.D.
1.0-inch
1.3-inch
1.3-inch
2.5-inch
2.5-inch
2.5-inch
2.5-inch
2.0-inch
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring 300 °C
-T
PTFE Compression Gasket, 350 °C
C Materials of Construction (MOC)
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
I Controller
-4848
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, Motor Speed
(included in
Control, and Data logging with Software. For use with up
base system) to three additional display modules.
-4848B
Same as above but for use with up to six
additional display modules.
-A2110E
Motor Controller
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
J 4848 Expansion Modules
-TDM
Tachometer Display Module
-MCM
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-MTM*
Motor Torque Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package for 4848/4838
* The MTM must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
D Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
E Motor
-VS
H Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
1/17 HP Variable Speed
F Magnetic Stirrer Drive
-M
General Purpose Magnetic
G Mag. Drive Materials of Construction
-MOC Symbol
Indicate Material of Construction
K Custom Options (List All Desired)
-GE
Gas Entrainment Stirrer
-BF
Removeable Baffle Set
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
L Certifications
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CE
European Community Standard (for EMC Compliance)
M Spare Parts Kit
-5529SPK
Spare Parts Kit for 5500 Series
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
66
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 3
Multi
Reactor
Systems
Inside this chapter you will find:
5000 MULTIPLE REACTOR
SYSTEM (MRS)
COMBINATORY CHEMISTRY AND
HIGH-THROUGHPUT SCREENING
SYSTEMS
5000 Multiple Reactor System (MRS)
Series Number:
5000
Type:
Multiple Vessel
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable
Vessel Sizes, mL:
45 and 75
Standard Pressure
MAWP, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
Model 5000 Multiple Reactor System, six 75 mL Vessels with Flat Gaskets and Head-Mounted Valves,
shown with included 4871 Process Controller.
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
T
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
300 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
he Parr Series 5000 Multiple Reactor System
has been designed to provide an integrated
system for running multiple reactions simultaneously and applying the principles of high
throughput experimentation to reactions conducted at elevated temperatures and pressures.
The principal features of the 5000 System
include:
• Six reactors with internal stirring.
• Operating pressures to 3000 psi.
• Operating temperatures to 300 °C.
• Individual temperature control.
• Continuous individual pressure monitoring.
• Computer control and data logging.
• Manifold system for rapid turn around and to
allow two different input gases.
• Volumes and reactor geometry designed for
three phase reactions.
• Flexible Control Software.
Stirred Batch Reaction Vessel
This multiple reaction system has been
designed around a vessel with 75 mL total
volume. This will accommodate between 15 mL
and 40 mL of liquid reactants which is close to
the minimum volume appropriate for heterogeneous catalytic reactions.
The vessel valves and accessories are
designed for maximum operating pressures
up to 3000 psi at operating temperatures up
to 300 °C. A system with 45 mL vessels is also
available.
Stirring System
All six vessels are stirred with a single magnetic stirrer system specifically designed and
built for this application. The magnetic drives
and fields are focused on the stirrer bars within
each vessel. High strength compact magnets
are used to provide coupling forces which will
operate through the heaters and vessels. The
stirring speed of the stirrer bar is variable from
0-1200 rpm. All vessels will have the same stirring speed during a single run of the apparatus.
This arrangement ensures that the difference in
reaction rates between vessels run in parallel
are due to set conditions other than variations
in stirrer speed.
Heaters
The external heaters surround the vessel
walls for rapid and uniform heating and temperature control. Each vessel is individually
temperature controlled. The 250-watt heater
used on each vessel produces heating rates up
to 15 °C per minute. An optional reactor cooling
support rack is available for air-cooling.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
68
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
5000
Model Number
45
75
No. of Reaction Vessels
6
Maximum Pressure
3000 psi (200 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
300 °C
Closure
with O-ring
Screw Cap
with Flat Gasket
c
t
o
r
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
3
A comparison of the plots of pressure drop
versus time within the reactors running under
parallel conditions will usually be the most
useful means of measuring reaction rates and
comparing operating conditions. The internal
thermocouple also provides a means of detecting temperature changes due to exothermic
reactions.
T316SS
Process Controller
Model 4871
Analog Inputs
6 Temperature
6 Pressure
1 Motor Speed
Analog Outputs
1 Stirrer Speed (Optional)
Digital Outputs
6 PID Temperature Control
Temperature Measurement
6 Thermowells
Heater Style
6 Band Heaters, Aluminum Block
Heater Power Watts
250W Per Station, 1500W Total
External Thermocouple
Optional
Stirrer Motor Type
Manual or Computer Controlled
PTFE- or Glass- Coated Magnetic Stirrer Bar
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps
15 / 7.5
Vessel Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1.18
Inside Depth, inches
1.50
2.69 Flat Gasket, 2.50 O-ring
3
(w/ Panel-mounted valves)
6
(w/ Head-mounted Valves)
Dimensions
Width, in.
Depth, in.
Height, in.
Heater
25.75
9.25
2.875
31
Stirrer
28
9.5
7.625
12
4871 Controller
13
11
15
14
Manifold, Remote
26.5
9.0
15
36
Manifold, Head Mount
26.5
9.0
15
18
Weight of Vessel, pounds
a
Screw Cap (6 Compression Bolts)
Material of Construction
Stirrer Style
e
Operating Modes
The Series 5000 Multiple Reaction System
provides an apparatus for running up to six
reactions in parallel to build a database for
comparing and optimizing operating conditions.
The user can design experiments to:
• Run all reactions at the same temperature
and pressure while varying catalyst loading
or reactant concentrations to optimize these
parameters.
• Run all reactors with identical loads varying
pressures at a common temperature to study
the effect of pressure on reaction rates.
• Run individual reactors with individual loading and temperature and pressure to screen
multiple options for activity.
Series 5000 Pressure Reactor System Specifications
Sizes, mL
R
Weight, lb.
Reactor Options
As Parr customers have come to expect with
our line of laboratory pressure reactor equipment, these reactors are offered with a number
of options which permit the user to configure
the system to their reactions and intended operating conditions. These options include:
O-ring or Flat Gasket Seals. Vessels with
O-ring seals are closed by simply tightening the
screw cap down hand tight. The maximum operating temperature will depend upon the O-ring
material. When equipped with FKM (Viton®)
O-rings operating temperatures up to 225 °C
are permitted. By substituting FFKM (Kalrez®)
O-rings this limit can be raised to 300 °C. Careful
consideration of chemical compatibility must
also be given when selecting O-ring materials.
PTFE gaskets can be used to temperatures up
to 300 °C and offer virtually universal chemical
compatibility. Six compression bolts are used to
develop the sealing forces on the PTFE gaskets
in this design.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com,
or call for more information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
69
5000 Multiple Reactor System (MRS)
MRS with individually controlled Gas Burettes.
Head Configuration. Each reaction vessel
is equipped with an inlet valve, exhaust valve,
safety rupture disc, and pressure transducer in
addition to an internal thermocouple. Vessels
can be modified to include a dip tube for liquid
sampling or a cold finger for cooling. The user
can choose to have the valves, transducer and
rupture disc mounted on a gage block connected
directly to the vessel head, or remotely mounted
on the back panel.
- Head Mounted. The head mounted design
makes it possible to remove the pressurized
vessels from the heater/stirrer assembly or to
prefill the vessels in a remote location. PEEK
flexible tubing with a quick slip connector
is provided for each vessel for inlet of gas.
Tubing is easily removed after gas fill.
- Panel Mounted. The remote panel mounted
arrangement connects all the pressure inlets/
outlets to each vessel with a single PTFE lined
stainless tubing. Alternate stainless steel tubing is offered if required. In the panel mount
valve configuration the gas inlet tubing generally remains attached to the vessels during
operation.
Materials of Construction. Type 316
Stainless Steel is the standard material of
construction for both the vessel with its wetted
parts and the gage block assemblies exposed
to vapors. For investigators working with systems containing strong mineral acids or other
more corrosive systems these vessels can be
made of most of the Parr standard materials of
construction.
Stirrer Configuration. Stirring is accomplished by use of either PTFE coated or glass
coated magnetic stirrer bars.
Thermocouple Configuration.
Thermocouples are mounted inside the vessel
for the best temperature monitoring and control.
The thermocouples are protected by stainless
steel sheaths which are inserted into a protective
thermowell. These thermowells make it easy to
install and remove thermocouples from the vessels, and also provide additional chemical and
mechanical protection for the thermocouple.
We also offer an external thermocouple option
with the thermocouples positioned in contact with
each cylinder wall.
Gas Manifold. The brass gas inlet manifold
is designed to handle both a purge gas, usually
nitrogen, and a reactant gas, usually hydrogen.
This can be set up to automatically fill each vessel
to the same initial pressure or to manually fill
each vessel to a unique operating pressure. This
gas manifold can also be supplied in T316SS to
meet more corrosive requirements.
4871 Process Controller
The Series 5000 Multiple Reaction System
is controlled by a dedicated Parr 4871 Process
Controller. A detailed description of this controller is found in Chapter 4 of this catalog,
pages 95-100.
For this application the controller is set up
to provide:
• Temperature monitoring and PID control
of each individual reactor.
• Pressure monitoring of each individual
reactor.
• Data logging of temperature and pressure
in each reactor.
• Control and logging of the common stirring
speed of the reactors.
The controller provides Ramp & Soak programming for individual reaction vessels, digital
inputs and outputs for interlocks, alarms or
other safety features, and additional analog and
digital inputs and outputs to control flow meters
or other accessories which might be added at
some future date. The user’s control station is a
PC running any current Windows operating system. A simplified graphical user interface has
been designed for the control and monitoring of
the Series 5000 Multiple Reaction System. The
PC is used strictly as the user interface and data
logging module. All control actions are generated in the 4871 Process Controller (not the PC).
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
70
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
S
y
s
s
3
Com pany
71
t
e
m
5000 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 5000(45)-T-SS-115-P-MV-2000-MB-CC
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 5000 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
5000
45 or 75 mL
B Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring, 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring, 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket, 300 °C
C Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
J Stirring
-M
-CC
-RPM
Control
Manual
Computer Controlled
Digital RPM Display
K Certifications
-No Symbol
No Certification
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
L Options
-SV*
Dip Tube with Sampling Valve
-CF*
Cold Finger
-MPG
Manifold Pressure Gage
-FMH
Flexible SS Hoses
-E-TC
External Thermocouple
-R-TC
Redundant Thermocouple
-RCS
Reactor Cooling Support
* Dip Tubes & Cold Fingers cannot be installed at the same time.
D Electrical Supply
-115
115 VAC
-230
230 VAC
Other Available Options
Glass Liner
PTFE Liner
E Thermocouple
-No Symbol
Type J (Standard)
-K
Type K
M Spare Parts Kit
-5009
Spare Parts Kit for 5000 Series
F
-H
-P
Valve Mounting
Head Mount w/ PEEK Tubing
Remote Panel Mount w/ PTFE Lined SS Hoses
G Inlet Valve
-AC
Automatic Check Valve
-MV
Manual Valve
H
Transducer Range
-1000
-2000
-3000
I
-MB
-GB
0-1000 psi
0-2000 psi
0-3000 psi
Stirrer Type
Magnetic Bar Stirrer, PTFE
Magnetic Bar Stirrer, Glass
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Combinatory Chemistry & High-Throughput Screening
P
arr designs and builds custom multiple reactor systems for use in combinatorial chemistry and high-throughput
screening. These systems are based on our wide range of reactor systems and feature overhead magnetic drive
stirrers. Contact our Customer Service Department for details and proposals for custom multiple reactor systems.
Five Reactor Parallel System
16 Station Multiple Reactor System
This system is a combination of sixteen standard 4560 Mini
Reactors with heaters, valves, pressure gages and rupture disc
assemblies and two 4871 Process Controllers with sixteen 4875
Power Controllers. It allows the user to run multiple reactions
simultaneously, applying the principles of high-throughput
experimentation. Individual variables that can be controlled are
gas mixtures, liquids, catalysts or other solids, stirring speed,
temperature, pressure and time.
This Parallel Reactor System incorporates five
160 mL, 4560 Series Stirred Mini Reactors rated
for use at 350 °C and 3000 psig / 200 bar. Each of
the reactors has a dedicated high pressure (5000
psig / 345 bar) 100 mL general purpose vessel
associated with it serving as a reactant gas feed
reservoir. These feed vessels are located above
and immediately behind the main reactors and
are each equipped with a dedicated pressure
transducer, thermocouple and a constant pressure regulator. The regulator maintains the
downstream reactor at a constant pressure while
the pressure transducer/thermocouple combination allows the process controller to accurately
monitor and record the real-time consumption
of reactant gas. This system would normally be
used to study various aspects of hydrogenation
or carbonylation reactions. The 4871 Process
Controller also controls and records the reactor
temperature, stirring speed and monitors the
reaction pressure. The compact reactor system
stand incorporates not only reactant gas feed
and vent/ purge manifolds but cooling water
feed and drain manifolds to simplify the installation and hook up.
12 Station HPCL System
This system makes use of the lower cost 5500 High Pressure
Compact Lab Reactors that feature a modified stand, aluminum
block heaters, removable vessels and a standard gage block
assembly. A control system (not pictured) automates the process,
monitors the parameters and collects the data.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
72
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
M
u
l
t
i
p
l
e
Three Reactor Parallel System
This system incorporates three 1.8 L 4570 Series High Pressure/
High Temperature reactors rated for use at 5000 psi (345 bar) @
500 °C. The reactors in this system are manufacatured of Alloy
C-276 and are equipped with internal coupon holders to facilitate
study of corrosion processes in harsh environments. This application does not require precisely controlled gas delivery; hence
individual gas feed vessels are not present, though gas supply and
gas vent manifolds are provided. A 4871 Process Controller is also
included (not shown).
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
S
y
s
t
e
m
s
3
Four Reactor Parallel System
This system consists of three 160 mL and one
450 mL 4560 Series Reactors rated for use at
3000 psi (200 bar) @ 350 °C. This configuration
allows both high throughput screening and
scale-up, if desired. Gas supply and vent manifolds for the entire system and pressure control
for the larger reactor are provided. Reactor
temperatures and stirring speed are controlled
by four 4848 Reactor controllers (not shown).
Six Reactor Parallel System with Automatic Sampling System
This system includes six 25 mL, 4590
Series Stirred Micro Reactors rated for use
up to 3000psi (200 bar) @ 350 °C. Gas supply
and vent manifolds are provided, as well as
manifolds to deliver and drain cooling water
to/from either the internal cold finger or the
external aluminum block heaters with cooling
channels. Note the automated liquid sampling system present on the reactor on the
left. This sampling system allows the sequential collection of several ~1 mL liquid samples
under full reactor operating pressure, and
automatically clears the liquid sampling lines
between samples. Control is provided by a
4871 Process Controller.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
73
Notes
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
74
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 4
Tubular
Reactor
Systems
Inside this chapter you will find:
5400 TUBULAR REACTOR SYSTEMS
FLUIDIZED BED REACTOR SYSTEMS
Series 5400 Continuous Flow Tubular Reactor Systems
Series Number:
ubular reactors are always used in a continuous flow mode with reagents flowing in and
products being removed. They can be the simplest of all reactor designs. Tubular reactors are
often referred to by a variety of names:
• Pipe reactors
• Packed-bed reactors
• Trickle-bed reactors
• Bubble-column reactors
• Ebulating-bed reactors
T
5400
Type:
Bench Top or
or Floor Stand
Vessel Sizes, mL:
5 mL - 1000 mL
Standard Pressure Rating
MAWP, psi (bar):
1500 (100)
3000 (200)
4500 (300)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
350 or 550
Single-phase flow in a tubular reactor can
be upward or downward. Two-phase flow can
be co-current up-flow, counter-current (liquid
down, gas up) or, most commonly, co-current
down-flow.
Tubular reactors can have a single wall and
be heated with an external furnace or they can
be jacketed for heating or cooling with a circulating heat transfer fluid. External furnaces can
be rigid, split-tube heaters or be flexible mantle
heaters. Tubular reactors are used in a variety
of industries:
• Petroleum
• Petrochemical
• Polymer
• Pharmaceutical
• Waste Treatment
• Specialty Chemical
• Alternative Energy
Tubular reactors are used
in a variety of applications:
• Carbonylation
• Dehydrogenation
• Hydrogenation
• Hydrocracking
• Hydroformulation
• Oxidative decomposition
• Partial oxidation
• Polymerization
• Reforming
Tubular reactors may be
empty for homogenous reactions or packed with catalyst
particles for heterogeneous
reactions. Packed reactors
require upper and lower supports to hold
particles in place. Uppermost packing is often of
inert material to serve as a pre-heat section. Preheating can also be done with an internal spiral
channel to keep incoming reagents close to the
heated wall during entry, as shown above.
Model 5403 with a 1” inside dia. x 24” length, 3-zone
clam shell heater with gas & liquid feed system.
It is often desirable to size a tubular reactor to
be large enough to fit 8 to 10 catalyst particles
across the diameter and be at least 40-50 particle
diameters long. The length to diameter ratio can
be varied to study the effect of catalyst loading by equipping the reactor with “spools” to
change this ratio.
Tubular reactor systems are highly customizable and can be made to various lengths and
diameters and engineered for various pressures
and temperatures.
We provide a split-tube furnace for heating
these vessels. Insulation is provided at each
end so that the end caps are not heated to the
same temperature as the core of the reactor. The
heater length is normally divided into one, two,
or three separate heating zones, although it can
be split into as many zones as required.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
76
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
T
u
b
u
l
a
r
R
e
a
c
s
4
Com pany
77
t
o
r
Series 5400 Tubular Reactor System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Sizes
O.D. / I.D. (in.)
O.D. / I.D. (mm)
5401
5402
5403
5404
3/8 in.
1/2 in.
1.0 in.
1.5 in.
0.38 / 0.28
0.50 / 0.37
1.9 / 1.0
2.0 / 1.5
9.5 / 7.0
13 / 9.4
48 / 25
51 / 38
Heated Length (in.)
6, 12, 24
Max. Pressure (psi)
3000
5000
Max. Temperature
550
550
Support Spools
No
Optional
Spiral Pre-Heat
No
Optional
12, 24, 36
3000
350
No. Ports in Top Head
1
4
No. Ports in Bottom Head
1
4
Internal Thermocouple
Optional
When ordering mass flow controllers, you will
need to specify:
1. Type of gas to be metered (e.g. N2, H2, CH4)
2. Maximum operating pressure of the gas (100
or 300 bar)
3. Maximum flow rate range in standard cc’s per
minute (sccm)
4. Pressure for calibration of the instrument
Open 3-Zone Split Tube Furnace with 1" I.D. Tubular Reactor.
We can furnish either a fixed internal thermocouple in each zone or a single movable
thermocouple that can be used to measure the
temperature at points along the catalyst bed.
External thermocouples are typically provided for
control of each zone of the heater.
Gas Feed Systems
Various gas feeds can be set up and operated
from a Gas Distribution Rack. In order to
deliver a constant flow of gas to a reactor, it is
necessary to provide gas at a constant pressure
to an electronic Mass Flow Controller. This
instrument will compare the actual flow rate
delivered to the set point chosen by the user, and
automatically adjust an integral control valve to
assure a constant flow. Care must be taken to
size these controllers for the specific gas, the flow
rate, and the pressure of operation. A mass flow
controller needs a power supply and read-out
device, as well as a means of introducing the
desired set point.
Mass flow controllers are available for use to
1500 psi and to 4500 psi. Considerable savings
can be obtained if the mass flow controller is to
be used only to 1500 psi.
The schematic at right depicts
the installation of a mass flow
controller for the introduction of
Gas
gas to a continuous-flow reaction
system. Such installations are
enhanced with the addition of a
by-pass valve for rapid filling.
A purge line can also be
added. It is typically used for
feeding nitrogen or helium to
Gas
remove air before reaction or to
remove reactive gases before
opening the reactor at the end of
a run. The purge line includes a shut-off valve,
metering valve, and a reverse-flow check valve.
Shut-off valves can be automated when using
a 4871 Control system.
FIC
F
MFC
F
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5400 Continuous Flow Tubular Reactor Systems
This 1-L Tubular Reactor System has two gas feeds,
one purge line, and one liquid feed. Custom pressure
controls enhance the heated gas/liquid separator.
This system has three 250 mL reactors operating in parallel and controlled by a 4871
Process Controller with operator interface on a single PC. This system has weighed
feed tanks and a two-stage pressure let down.
Liquid Metering Pumps
Back Pressure Regulators
High pressure piston pumps are most often
used to inject liquids into a pressurized reactor
operating in a continuous-flow mode. For low
flow rates, HPLC pumps, many of which are
rated for 5000 psig, are excellent choices.
Typical flow rates for pumps of this type range
up to 10 or 40 mL per minute. Pumps are available to accommodate manual control from their
digital faceplate or computer-control from
a 4871 Process Controller.
Chemical feed pumps are our recommendation for continuous feeding of liquids when the
desired flow rate is greater than 2 liters per hour.
Parr can assist with the feed pump selection.
We will need to know the type of liquid; the
minimum, typical, and maximum desired feed
rate; the maximum operating pressure; and
any special operating considerations such as
corrosion possibilities.
In addition to supplying gases to a reaction
through electronic mass flow controllers, the
reactor is kept at a constant pressure by installing a Back Pressure Regulator (BPR) downstream
of the reactor. This style of regulator will release
products only when the reactor pressure exceeds
a preset value.
When a BPR is used in conjunction with
mass flow controllers, the user is assured that a
constant flow of gas is passing through a reactor, which is being held at a constant pressure.
This provides for the highest degree of control
and reproducibility in a continuous-flow reactor
system.
Cooling Condensers
It is often desired to cool the products of
the reaction prior to handling them. Cooling
condensers are available for this purpose. An
adaptation of our standard condensers provides
an excellent design.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
78
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
T
Gas/Liquid Separators
Tubular reactors operating
in continuous-flow mode with
both gas and liquid products
will also require a Gas/Liquid
Separator for smooth operation. The separator is placed
downstream of the reactor,
often separated from the reactor by a cooling condenser. In
the separator vessel, liquids
are condensed and collected in
the bottom of the vessel. Gases
and non-condensed vapors
are allowed to leave the top
of the vessel and pass to the
back pressure regulator. It is
important to operate the BPR
with a single fluid phase to
prevent oscillation of the reactor pressure.
The gas/liquid separator
can be sized large enough to
act as a liquid product receiver
that can be manually drained
periodically. Many of the nonstirred pressure vessels made
by Parr are ideally suited for
use as gas/liquid separators.
Vessels of 300, 600, 1000,
or 2000 mL are commonly
chosen.
u
b
u
l
a
r
R
e
a
c
s
4
Com pany
79
t
o
r
This continuous flow stirred
reactor system is on a cart with
with our Modular Frame System.
This modular frame allows for
easy access and flexibility in
hook-ups, accessories, and flow,
including an interchangeable
tubular reactor.
(below) This tubular reactor system
features a single-zone 12-in long heater
to take reactor temperatures to 500 °C.
The gas feed system includes automated
shut-off valves on the three MFCs and on
the purge line. The Gas/Liquid Separator
vessel is jacketed to allow for subambient cooling. Operator controls the system
via a remote PC using the included
Model 4871 Process Controller.
Control and Data
Acquisition Systems
A variety of solutions exist
to meet the needs of system
operators. System accessories
such as heaters, mass flow
controllers, and pumps can
be obtained with individual
control packages to create a
manual, Distributed Control
System (DCS) based on our
4838 and 4848 Controllers.
As the number of channels
to be controlled increases,
economics and convenience
will often dictate that the
distributed system of individual
controllers should be replaced
with the computer-based
Model 4871 Process Controller
(PCC).
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 5400 Continuous Flow Tubular Reactors
n this page are schematic
representations of typical
tubular reactor systems, along
with a symbols chart to facilitate understanding. We have
provided an ordering number
for each of these examples.
O
Order No. for this system would be:
5402B-SS-115-ST1(6)-1500-DCS-GF(1)-PL-LF(1)-ITW-CCDGLS(300)-MPC
Purge
F
PG
T/C
FIC
TIC
F
Gas
MFC
PT
T/C
Key to Symbols
F
Liquid
Inlet
Relief Valve
Ball Valve
Filter
F
MFM
Needle Valve
Single-zone Tubular Reactor System
with one Liquid Feed, one Gas Feed,
and one Purge Line.
Mass Flow Meter
Metering
MFC
Mass Flow
Controller
Order No. for this system would be:
5403F-SS-230-ST3(24)-3000-PCC-GF(2)-PL-LF(1)-ISP-CSS-ITWGLS(600)-APC-ASV(3)
3-way
SIC
Rupture Disc
Speed Indicating
Controller
S
Gas1
F
MFC
F
MFC
S
Tank Pressure
Regulator
Pump
Purge
GAS 1
S
PT
Pressure
Transducer
Back Pressure
Regulator
Gas 2
FIC
S
Flow Indicating
Controller
PT
PG
Liquid
T/C
Electric-Actuated
Air-Operated
Solenoid Valve
Check Valve
PG
T/C
Pressure Gage
Thermocouple
PIC
TIC
Pressure Indicating
Controller
Temperature
Indicating
Controller
4871
Process
Controller
T/C
T/C
PIC
T/C
Vent
BPR
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
80
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
T
u
b
u
l
a
r
R
e
a
c
s
4
Com pany
81
t
o
r
Series 5400 Ordering Guide
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 5400 Series Reactor can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size (O.D. / I.D.)
5401
3/8 in. (0.38” / 0.28”)
5402
1/2 in. (0.50” / 0.37”)
5403
1.0 in. (1.9” / 1.0”)
5404
1.5 in. (2.0” / 1.5”)
F Controller
-PCC
PC-based Process Control (4871-style)
-DCS
Distributed Control System (4838-style)
C Electrical Supply
-115
115 VA, 50/60Hz
-230
230 VAC, 50/60Hz
G Custom Options
-GF(#)
Number of Gas Feeds
-PL
Purge Gas Feed Line
-LF(#)
Number of Liquid Feeds
-ISP
Internal Pre-heat Spiral (5403/5404 only)
-CSS
Catalyst Support Spools (5403/5404 only)
-ITW
Internal Thermowell, with Movable T/C
-IZT
Internal, Zoned, Fixed T/Cs
-CCD
Cooling Condenser
-GLS(#)
Gas/Liquid Separator (300, 600, 1000, 2000 mL)
-SPH
Separator Heater
-MPC
Manual Pressure Control
-APC*
Automated Pressure Control
-ASV(#)*
Automated Shut-off Valves (1-12)
*Available only with 4871 Process Control (PCC)
D Heater Options
-ST1(#)
Split Tube, 1-Zone
-ST3(#)
Split Tube, 3-Zone
-FM(#)
Flexible Mantle
-WJ(#)
Welded Jacket
Add suffix (6), (12), (24), (36) for heated length (in.)
H Certifications
-No Symbol
No Certification Required
-PARR
Parr Certification
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-C
China
Add suffix F for Floor Stand mounting
Add suffix B for Bench Top mounting
B Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-HC
Alloy 276
-TI
Titanium
-IN
Alloy 600
-MO
Alloy 400
E Maximum Operating Pressure
-1500
1500 psi / 100 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-4500
4500 psi / 300 bar
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Fluidized Bed Reactors
luidized Bed Reactors are
used extensively in the
chemical process industries.
The distinguishing feature of a
fluidized bed reactor is that the
bed of solid particles or catalyst is supported by an up flow
of gas. This reactor provides
easy loading and removing of
catalyst. This is advantageous
when the solids bed must
be removed and replaced
frequently. A high conversion
with a large throughput is possible with this style of reactor.
Such reactors inherently possess excellent heat transfer
and mixing characteristics.
Fluidized beds have been
significantly utilized in chemical
processes, in which parameters
such as diffusion or heat
transfer are the major design
parameters. Compared to
packed bed, a fluidized bed has
notable advantages such as
better control of temperature,
no hot spot in the bed, uniform
catalyst distribution and longer
life of the catalyst. The desirability of using fluidized beds is
dependent on achieving good
mixing between the solids and
the suspending fluid.
Nearly all the significant
commercial applications of fluidized bed technology concern
gas-solid systems. Applications
of fluidized bed reactors
include but are not limited to
Fisher-Tropsch synthesis, catalytic cracking of hydrocarbons
and related high molecular
weight petroleum fractions.
Gasification in a fluidized bed
can be utilized to convert coal,
biomass and other waste materials into synthesis gas.
F
C
B
D
A
The Parr Fluidized Bed Reactor features the Reactor (A), a Heated Cyclone
Separator (B), a Cooling Condenser (C), and a 600 mL Product Receiver (D).
The reactor system pictured
on this page includes the following key components:
• A gas handling and mixing
sub-system used to blend and
regulate the flow of reactant
gas to the bottom of the
reactor.
• The reactor is roughly
one meter long with a 2.5 cm
ID. The lower portion of the
reactor incorporates an easily
replaced porous metal gas diffusion plate and the top of the
reactor widens abruptly to form
a disengaging zone for the
fluidized bed. Separate heaters
are provided for both the main
reactor and disengaging zone.
A multipoint thermocouple is
provided for monitoring the
internal reactor temperature
distribution.
• A heated cyclone separator
or filter is provided immediately downstream of the
reactor to capture the fines
resulting from particle attrition.
• The reaction products are
then cooled by a condenser
and collected in a 600 mL product receiver.
• The system pressure is
maintained by a dome loaded
back pressure regulator.
• All system functions and
parameters are monitored and
maintained by a Parr 4871
Process Controller (not shown,
see Chapter 6, page 101).
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
82
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
T
u
b
u
l
a
r
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
4
s
Cutaway of the
Fluidized Bed Reactor
Cutaway of the
Cyclonic Separator
The Flexible Mantle Heater
attaches in two pieces and
provides even heating to the
entire length of the reactor.
Flexible Mantle Heaters are
wrapped around this 30”-long
Fluidized Bed Reactor and the
Cyclonic Separator to maintain temperatures to 350 °C.
This system is also equipped
with two gas feeds with
automated shut-off valves,
automated pressure control,
and a Model 4871 Process
Controller (not shown).
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
83
Notes
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
84
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 5
Specialty
& Custom
Reactor
Systems
Inside this chapter you will find:
BIOFUELS AND ALTERNATIVE
FUELS RESEARCH SYSTEMS
HORIZONTAL REACTORS
SUPERCRITICAL FLUIDS
GTO (GAS-TO-OIL) SYSTEM
APPARATUS FOR VAPOR PRESSURE
DETERMINATION
DISBONDING APPARATUS FOR
ASTM G146
APPARATUS FOR CORROSION
STUDIES
Introduction to Specialty Custom Reactors
arr Instrument Company designs and builds
a wide variety of specialty and custom reactor systems. These reactor systems embody
the spirit of innovation that has made Parr the
world leader in laboratory pressure apparatus.
Our technical sales, engineering and production teams are happy to work directly with our
customers’ scientists and/or engineers to very
quickly, accurately, and economically proceed
from concept to manufacturing. The following
pages illustrate several examples of specialty
and custom reactor systems designed and built
using exactly this collaborative process.
To facilitate collaboration between Parr and
our customers as well as to support the high
quality of our equipment, we have invested
heavily in both design and manufacturing
technology. All custom reactor systems are
designed with 3D modeling software to create
a virtual prototype prior to manufacturing. This
model supports clear communication between
the customer and Parr and shortens the design
phase of such projects. On the manufacturing
floor, state of the art, five axis, computer controlled machines programmed and operated by
Parr’s highly skilled machinists allow rapid and
accurate production of even the most complex
parts.
To match the variety of reactor systems available, our control design and programming team
offers multiple types of control systems, ranging
from simple, manual temperature control to
completely automated and integrated PC-based
control, developed to each customer’s specification. Control systems are discussed more
completely in Chapter 6.
If you have an idea for a reactor system that
is not described in this catalog, please contact
Parr’s world-class technical sales department —
there is a very good chance we can build a reactor system to meet your needs.
P
Custom-designed Stirred Reactor System
for a proprietary process.
Pressure vessel with multiple 1-inch
diameter windows installed.
Parr uses the latest technology in milling and manufacturing
techniques to produce your custom system to the highest level
of precision possible in the field today.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
86
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
p
e
c
i
a
l
t
y
&
C
u
s
t
o
m
R
e
a
c
s
5
Com pany
87
t
o
r
Bio-Fuels and Alternative Fuels Research Systems
Custom Reactor Systems like the above Bio-Fuels Research System are a product of collaboration between the researchers
and the Engineers at Parr Instrument Company.
arr Instrument Company manufactures
non-stirred vessels for the decomposition
of biomass in ammonia and steam. Parr stirred
reactors, including a new horizontal reactor
technology, have been designed for research
processes that include hydrogenation, isomerization, and metathesis reactions. In addition, fully
customizable continuous-flow tubular reactor
systems have been developed with continuous
reactant feed and product handling capabilities.
The above photo illustrates a complete pilot
scale plant used for hydrogenating feedstock
that originates from a proprietary fermentation
process. The system is used to develop and
optimize the process conditions necessary for
a much larger demonstration-scale system,
P
ultimately leading to full-scale production of
renewable fuels.
The system is comprised of five major
subsystems: from left to right, a gas and liquid
feed system, the jacketed tubular reactor module
including a reactant pre-heater and circulating
bath, product recovery and backpressure control,
an auto-sampler and a Parr 4871 Control System
(not pictured). The system is completely automated and includes an auto-sampling subsystem
that periodically samples the reactor output
stream in order to accurately monitor product
quality.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Horizontal Stirred Reactors
tirring biomass is not easy to do in a vertical
reactor. A line of reactors has been developed by Parr Instrument Company to function
horizontally.
Horizontal reactors enable researchers to
mix bio feed stock and other cellulosic materials
such as:
• straw
• corn stover
• sugar cane
• grasses
• plants
• wood pulp
• wood chips
• fibers
S
In the horizontal position, the internal stirrers
tumble the material rather than try to stir it with
a standard vertical stirrer. These custom reactors
are secured vertically for loading and then safely
tilted horizontally for stirring. They can also be
designed to be operated in both a horizontal and
vertical position.
One Liter Horizontal Stirred Reactor with heavy-duty stirring
motor in its upright position. A 4848 Controller is used to monitor
the system pressure and control the temperature and stirring
speed.
The 4578 Pressure Reaction System shown above is a 1.8 L, fixed head reactor is mounted on a floor stand and is rated for
temperatures up to 500 ˚C with a maximum pressure of 5000 psig. In the horizontal position, the internals stirrers tumble the
material rather than try to stir it with a standard vertical stirrer. These custom reactors are secured vertically for loading
and then safely tilted horizontally for stirring.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
88
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
p
e
c
i
a
l
t
y
&
C
u
s
t
o
m
R
e
a
c
s
5
Com pany
89
t
o
r
This one liter reactor can be oriented vertically for loading or tilted horizontally for stirring. A heavy-duty stirring motor and double
anchor stirrers are used. Another option would be to tilt upside down for discharge. An optional flexible mantle heater (not pictured)
can be used to obtain temperatures up to 350 C. Maximum pressure is 1900 psig for this system.
The reactor shown in the two images above and right has a five gallon capacity, and is used for stirring horizontally. Pneumatic controls on the
left can tilt the system upright to open the bottom drain valve. The product is filtered and collected in the lower heated sample collection vessel.
This system is used for producing synthetic fabric from biomass as an alternative to a petroleum-based process.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Supercritical Fluids
supercritical fluid is any substance
at a temperature and pressure
above its critical point. Such fluids can
diffuse through solids like a gas and
dissolve materials like a liquid. Near the
critical point, small changes in pressure
or temperature result in large changes
in density, allowing many properties of
a supercritical fluid to be “fine tuned”.
Supercritical fluids are often suitable
substitutes for organic solvents in
a range of industrial and laboratory
processes.
Carbon dioxide is one of the many
commonly used supercritical fluids. It
is relatively simple to exceed its critical
point (31 °C , 1057 psi). Applications
that involve supercritical fluids include
A
extractions, nano particle and nano
structured film formation, supercritical
drying, carbon capture and storage, as
well as enhanced oil recovery studies.
Parr has provided systems at one time
or another for all the aforementioned
applications.
Water is another substance that is
often used in its supercritical condition
(374 °C, 3185 psi). its excellent thermal
conductivity properties make it the fluid
of choice in pressurized nuclear reactors
for electricity generation. The extremely
aggressive and reactive nature of
supercritical water makes it an excellent
choice for the oxidative destruction of
some hazardous waste materials.
Vent
The batch supercritical extraction vessel
pictured above is designed for use to 5000
psi (345 bar) at 350 °C. This 600 mL vessel
was equipped with a liquid CO2 pump
capable of delivering up to 24 mL/min.
S
To Vent
air
Vent
PIC
S
air
CO2
PG
BPR
PT
TIC
T/C
F
T/C
Model 4871
Controller
TIC
1.2 Liter
200 Bar
300 ˚C
PC
The supercritical fluid extraction system pictured left and diagramed above
incorporates a 1.2 liter vessel rated for use at 3000 psig (200 bar) at temperatures
to 300 °C. The system includes an automated inlet valve and an air-piloted back
pressure regulator which is used to facilitate a controlled pressure release at
the end of the test. The vessel is heated with a 1500W flexible mantle heater.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
90
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
S
p
e
c
i
a
l
t
y
&
C
u
s
t
o
m
R
e
a
c
s
5
Com pany
91
t
o
r
GTO (Gas-To-Oil) System
Parr GTO System
his system incorporates three tubular reactors
that can be configured as required to operate in a strictly parallel fashion or in a cascade
arrangement where the products from one
reactor are immediately directed to a second
reactor. This type of system can support reaction
schemes including but not limited to the FisherTropsch process, methanation reactions, steam
reforming and other similar processes.
The Fisher-Tropsch process converts carbon
monoxide and hydrogen into oils or fuels that
can substitute for petroleum products. The reaction uses a catalyst based on iron or cobalt and
is fueled by the partial oxidation of coal or woodbased materials such as ethanol, methanol, or
syngas. This reaction scheme offers a promising
route to producing economical renewable transportation fuels. By carefully controlling the
T
temperature and oxygen content, resulting products can range from syngas to “green diesel”.
One of the unique features of this system is
a gas blending subsystem capable of mixing up
to four reactant gases followed by a controlled
delivery of this blended mixture to each of
the three reactors via dedicated mass flow
controllers.
Downstream components for each reactor
include a heat exchanger/condenser, a gas/
liquid separator (product receiver) and a fully
automated back pressure regulator. The system
includes support for introducing liquid reactants
via a high pressure metering pump. The system
comes completely automated with the addition
of the highly versatile 4871 Process Controller
(not pictured).
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Other Specialty and Custom Reactor Systems
Apparatus for Vapor Pressure Determination
This custom dual vessel system is used for the accurate determination
of the saturation pressure of specialty organic materials as a function of
temperature.
All of the associated head fittings, valves and plumbing, including the
pressure transducers, are enclosed in a heated, temperature controlled,
aluminum block to minimize temperature gradients and to ensure that
the average system temperature closely matches the temperature of the
vessels, including their screw cap closures, housed in the lower temperature controlled block. The system is shown with the exposed valves and
fittings which are covered by an aluminum plate during normal operation of the system.
Disbonding Apparatus for ASTM G146
This automated reactor system is used for performing hydrogen
induced disbonding (HID) tests. This system is capable of attaining the
conditions necessary for treating samples consisting of bimetallic plate
typically used in refinery High Pressure/High Temperature hydrogen gas
service. The tests run in this apparatus can be used to assess the effects
of material composition, processing methods, fabrication techniques,
and heat treatment as well as the effects of hydrogen partial pressure,
service temperature, and cooling rate.
This system can be used over a broad range of pressures, temperatures, cooling rates, and gaseous hydrogen environments where HID
could be a significant problem. These typically range from 14 to 20 MPa
hydrogen gas pressure and temperature from 300 to 500 °C. This testing
regime is fully described in ASTM Standard Practice G 146.
Apparatus for Corrosion Studies
This custom vessel was designed specifically to be used for long
term (up to 4000 hours) corrosion testing of zirconium alloy samples
in aqueous solutions near the critical point of water.
The vessel illustrated is a non-stirred, fixed head design with a volume of 3.7 liters with a maximum working temperature and pressure of
450 °C and 275 bar, respectively.
The vessel is heated with three clamp-on style band heaters. The
system is capable of maintaining a uniform temperature of ± 1 °C over
a working zone of 30 cm. Valves are provided on the head of the vessel
for purging with inert gas prior the start the test as well as periodic sampling of the contents of the vessel. The controller is equipped to record
temperature and pressure data for the duration of the test.
For more information on any of these custom systems please visit www.parrinst.com
or contact the Parr Technical Service Department.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
92
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 6
Reactor
Controllers
Inside this chapter you will find:
CONTROLLER OVERVIEW
4848 REACTOR CONTROLLER
4848B EXPANDED REACTOR
CONTROLLER
4848M MASTER CONTROLLER
4848A REACTOR CONTROLLER FOR
AC MOTORS
4838 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
A3504HC SPECVIEW SOFTWARE
4871 PROCESS CONTROLLER
4875 POWER CONTROLLER
4876 POWER CONTROLLER
4877 VALVE CONTROLLER
A2110E MOTOR CONTROLLER
A2200E MASS FLOW CONTROLLER
Parr Controller Overview
The Model 4848 Reactor Controller is our
general-purpose reactor controller. It can control
temperature and stirring speed, and it can be
equipped to monitor a redundant temperature
and pressure. It can datalog and be operated
remotely from a PC.
The Model 4848B Reactor Controller is an
expanded reactor controller. It has the same
capabilities as the 4848 but with a larger chassis.
The 4848B can accommodate up to six meters,
plus the Primary Temperature Module.
The Model 4838 Reactor Controller is
offered to control temperature in non-stirred
pressure vessels. It can be expanded to include
an optional pressure or redundant temperature
module.
The Model 4871 Process Controller is a full
featured process controller, which can handle
either a single reactor with a wide variety of
inputs and outputs or multiple reactors running
independently. It controls the entire process
including gas and liquid flows through a PC
interface custom tailored to the application.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
94
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
The Model 4848M is a controller for Master/Slave setups. It is most often
used with large reactors with multi-zone heaters where each zone draws
enough power to require its own power supply.
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s
6
Parr Instrument
Company offers
The Model 4848A is a reactor controller for use with AC Motors.
The A2110E is a Motor Controller. It can be provided with or without a
tachometer display.
a full line of
reactor controllers
The A2200E is a Mass Flow Controller. It can handle up to four Mass
Flow Controllers at one time.
to monitor, control,
The 4875 Power Controller is utilized with a 4871 Process Controller or a
4848M Master Controller.
datalog, and archive
The 4876 Power Controller is utilized with a 4871 Process Controller or
4848M Master Controller. It can handle up to three heater outputs and is
only available in 230V.
test data.
The 4877 Valve Controller is utilized with a 4871 Process Controller to
actuate valves.
The A3504HC SpecView Software is enhanced software for use with
the 4848 or 4838 Controllers. It provides superior datalogging and has an
excellent user interface.
4838
4848
4848B
4871
One Non-Stirred
Pressure Vessel
(No Motor Control
or cooling)
One Stirred
Reactor
One Stirred
Reactor
Advanced
Systems*
Temperature Control
One
One
One
Multiple
Pressure Monitoring
Optional
Optional
Optional
Multiple
Motor Speed Control
No
One
One
Multiple
Auxiliary I/O
No
No
Up to two inputs
Multiple
Redundant Temperature Monitoring
Optional
Optional
Optional
Multiple
PC User Interface with Datalogging
Optional
Optional
Optional
Included
Digital Communications
RS-485
RS-485
RS-485
Ethernet
Expansion Modules
Up to One
Up to Three
Up to Six
Unlimited
Number of Reactors Controlled
One
One
One
Multiple
Application:
Features:
* Contact a Parr Customer Service Representative for your custom application needs.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
95
4848 Reactor Controller
The 4848B has a larger chassis to accommodate up to six
expansion modules.
1. Primary Temperature
Control Module (PTM)
The temperature control
module can accept either
thermocouples or RTD
temperature sensors. It has
three outputs that are used for
heating and cooling control
and for alarm-actuated heater
cut off. The control function
is a full proportional, integral
and derivative (PID) control
with auto-tune capabilities. The
controller provides ramp and
soak programming with up to
49 segments.
4848 Reactor Controller shown with PTM, MCM, PDM, and HTM Modules installed.
The 4848 Reactor Controller
brings digital communications
to all of the functions of this
modular reactor controller. The
4848 offers all of the features
expected in a Parr general
purpose reactor controller,
namely:
• PID programming with Autotuning capability for precise
temperature control and
minimum overshoot
• Ramp and soak programming
• Separate heating and cooling control loops
• Optional Solenoid Valve
Module for cooling control
• Motor speed control
• High or low power heater
switch
• Lockout relay and reset for
over temperature protection
• Optional expansion modules
for tachometer, pressure,
and high temperature alarm
With the Parr 4848 Reactor
Controller, all of the expansion modules as well as the
primary temperature control
module are equipped with
bi-directional digital communications [RS-485] that enable the
user to not only log all current
readings to a PC, but also to
send set points, stirrer speeds,
and alarm values from the PC
to the 4848 Controller.
Modular Design
A total of seven different
modules are offered for the
4848 Controller. A maximum
of three expansion modules
in addition to the primary
temperature control can be
installed in the 4848 Controller.
The user can select either the
Tachometer Display Module or
the Motor Control Module. This
either/or option also applies to
the High Temperature Cut Off
and External Temperature Limit
Modules.
2. Pressure Display Module
(PDM)
This pressure monitoring
module is set up to accept
its input from a pressure
transducer mounted on the
reactor or attached accessory. It can be set to accept
a wide variety of operating
ranges. Operating pressures
are transmitted continuously
to the PC. These modules are
available calibrated in either
psi or bar. The output from the
pressure monitoring module is
connected to the alarm relay to
shut off power to the heater if
the high pressure limit set by
the operator is reached during
operation.
3. Tachometer Display
Module (TDM)
In this configuration, the
module will display the stirrer
speed and will continuously
transmit it to the PC for display
and logging. The stirrer speed
is set manually using a potentiometer on the face of the 4848
Controller.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
96
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
4848 back panel for 115V model.
4. Motor Control Module
(MCM)
In this configuration, the
module provides true closed
loop feedback control of the
reactor stirring speed. The
primary output of this module
is wired to dynamically adjust
the motor voltage in response
to changes in motor loading.
This provides better reactor
stirring speed regulation than
the standard open loop speed
control, especially with reactions that involve changing
viscosities. Additionally, the
use of this module allows the
stirring speed set point to be
adjusted remotely from the
host PC. A by-product of this
closed loop speed control
scheme is that the value of
the primary controller output
directly reflects the degree of
loading on the motor in order
to maintain a constant stirring speed. While not a direct
torque measurement, this is
a useful option for those who
want to, for example, monitor
the progress of polymerization
reactions in which there is a
change in viscosity as the reaction proceeds. The output to
the motor can be displayed and
logged on the PC when used
with the A3504HC SpecView
Software.
5. Motor Torque Module
(MTM)
The MTM will display motor
output from an MCM. It is particularly useful for applications
with changing viscosities.
6. High Temperature Cut Off
Module (HTM)
The high temperature cut
off module or limit controller
augments the operation of the
main control module. Its redundant sensor can be mounted
either internally or externally to
the reactor. The primary output
of the module is wired to activate the lockout relay in order
to provide safety shutdown
should the reactor reach an
unsafe temperature.
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
6
Com pany
97
l
e
r
7. External
Temperature Limit
Module (ETLM)
This configuration
uses the same aforementioned HTM Module
with its sensor mounted
in such a way to monitor
the reactor’s outside
wall temperature. The
primary output of this
module is used to limit
the external temperature
of the reactor. This is
done by interrupting the
control signal form the
main temperature controller when the external
temperature exceeds a
predetermined value.
The secondary output of this
module is used to activate the
lockout relay in a non-latching
manner if the outside wall
temperature exceeds a preset
unsafe temperature. The use
of this module provides an
effective alternative to cascade
control, offering improved temperature regulation in systems
with large thermal lags, such
as those found in non-stirred
reactors or systems that use
PTFE liners, as well as systems
where the reactants have low
heat capacities, such as gas
phase reactions.
8. Solenoid Valve Module
(SVM)
This package includes a
solenoid valve and a flow
adjustment valve with all of the
parts required to assemble an
automatic system to control the
flow of coolant through a cooling coil in any reactor. It plugs
into the cooling output socket
on the 4848. It is designed for
use with tap water as the cooling media.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
4848 Reactor Controller
4848 Ordering Guide
A composite identification number to be used when
ordering a 4848 Reactor Controller can be developed by
combining individual symbols from the separate sections.
Example: A 4848 Reactor Controller, 115V electrical,
with Tachometer Display Module, Solenoid Valve Module,
RS-485 to USB Cable, and SpecView Package would be
listed as:
No . 4 8 4 8 - E B- T DM- SVM- A1 9 2 5 E 4 - A3 5 0 4H C
A.
Model
4848
The 4848B Reactor Controller is a larger version of the 4848 with
up to six expansion modules
4848B Expanded Reactor Controller
The 4848B Expanded Reactor Controller is a
larger version of the 4848 Reactor Controller.
It has the same Primary Temperature Control
Module as the 4848, and can accommodate up to
six expansion modules. It will also communicate
with the A3504HC SpecView software.
The 4848B is most useful when the process
requires more modules than a single 4848 can
handle. A common application would be a
stirred reactor which requires a pressure display
showing internal pressure and the pressure of
an external gas burette. The 4848B has a chassis
with enough space to handle both burettes and
associated cables and other infrastructure.
The 4848B also has two optional Auxiliary
modules. These will read an analog signal, most
commonly 4-20mA or 0-5VDC. These can be fed
into the chassis through a dedicated auxiliary
input slot.
4848M Master Controller
The 4848M Master Controller is typically used
with multi-zone heaters such as those used on
our 4555 Series Stirred Reactors. It will interface
with one or more slave boxes, allowing a dedicated power supply to be used for each zone.
4848A Reactor Controller for AC motors
The 4848A can be used with AC Motors.
DC motors are more or less ubiquitous in Parr
equipment, but some specialty applications
require AC motors. The 4848A allows a tachometer display or motor control module to be used
with an AC motor.
A
B.
Voltage
-EB
C.
Options
-TDM
C.
Options
-SVM
C.
Options
-A1925E4
C.
Options
-A3504HC
Base Model
PID, Ramp & soak digital communications with motor speed
control and software
Model No. Description
4848
Reactor Controller for use with up to three additional display modules
4848B
Reactor Controller for use with up to six additional display modules
4848M
Master Controller
4848A
Reactor Controller for AC Motors
B Electrical Supply
-EB
115 VAC
-EE
230 VAC
C Options
-TDM
-MCM
-PDM
-HTM
-ETLM
-MTM*
-SVM
-AUX
-A1925E4
-A1925E6
-A2208E**
-A3504HC
Tachometer Display Module
Tachometer w/Motor Control Module
Pressure Display Module
High Temperature Cut Off Module
External Temperature Limit Module
Motor Torque Module
Solenoid Valve Module (for Cooling Control)
0-5 VDC, 4-20 MA (4848B Only)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller (required for data logging)
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
RS-485 Daisy Chain for Multiple Controllers
SpecView Software Package
*The MTM module must be installed in conjunction with the MCM.
**Must be used with A1925E6.
Dimensions
Model
4848
4848B
4848M
4848A
Width, in.
11.13
13.62
11.13
13.62
Height, in.
9.67
9.64
9.67
9.64
Depth, in.
11.25
11.25
11.25
11.25
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
98
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
s
6
Com pany
99
l
l
e
r
4838 Reactor Controller
he 4838 Reactor Controller is designed to
control the temperature in our line of nonstirred pressure vessels. No provision is made
for the current or future expansion to control
motor stirring speeds or to actuate cooling
water. The controller contains the same Primary
Temperature Control Module used in the 4848
Controller and provides identical control and
communications capabilities. A high/low heater
switch feature, as well as a lockout relay and
reset for over temperature protection, are also
included. The 4838 Reactor Controllers can be
enhanced with the addition of either a Pressure
Display Module (PDM) or High Temperature Cut
Off Module (HTM). An External Temperature
Limit Module (ETLM) can be substituted for
the HTM.
Features found on the 4838 Reactor Controller
are:
• PID programming with Auto-tuning capability
for precise temperature control and minimum
overshoot
• Ramp and soak programming
• High or low power heater switch
• Lockout relay and reset for over temperature
protection.
T
Series 4838 Ordering Guide
A
A composite identification number to be
used when ordering a 4838 Reactor Controller
can be developed by combining individual
symbols from the separate sections.
Example: A 4838 Reactor Controller, 115V
electrical, with optional Pressure Display Module
and SpecView Software would be listed as:
No.4838-EB-PDM-A3504HC-A1925E4
A.
B.
Model Voltage
4838
-EB
C.
C.
Options Options
-PDM
-A3504HC
Parr 4838 Reactor Controller shown with optional HTM Module
C.
Options
-A1925E4
Base Model
For Non-Stirred Vessels, PID, Ramp and Soak, Digital Communications and Software
Model No.
4838
B
-EB
-EE
Description
Reactor Controller
Electrical Supply
115 VAC
230 VAC
C
Options
-PDM
-HTM
-ETLM
-A1925E4
-A1925E6
-A3504HC
Pressure Display Module
High Temperature Cut Off Module
External Temperature Limit Module
RS-485 to USB Converter with 30-ft. Cable
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, with 30-ft. Cable
SpecView Software Package for 4848 and 4838
Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
4838
10.19
Height, in.
7.11
Depth, in.
7.92
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
®
SpecView Software for 4848 and 4838 Controllers
SpecView Software
The unified Modbus communication architecture of the 4848 allows us to bring the power
and convenience of SpecView to the 4848
and 4838 Series Controllers. This version of
SpecView provides support for up to eight
individual loop or limit controllers.
SpecView Features and Benefits:
• Real time charting
• Datalogging
• Alarm and event logging
• Superior alarm annunciation
• Customizable graphical user interface
SpecView Graphic User Interface for 4848 and 4838 Controllers
This powerful program is highly customizable
and configurable to show variables beyond the
process value such as heater output, motor output or alarm status. Notes are easily inserted into
the interface and data, and the entire interface
can be rearranged and edited for the intended
process.
PC Requirements:
SpecView runs on the following Windows
operating systems:
• Windows 8, 8.1; 32 bit & 64 bit
• Windows 7; 32 bit & 64 bit
• Windows Vista 32 bit. Vista 64 has shown
some instability.
• Windows Server 2003, 2008, 2012; 32 and 64
bit versions
• Windows XP; 32 bit & 64 bit
Note: SpecView does not work on Windows 8
RT (as found on some Microsoft Surface tablets)
Parr recommends a minimum of:
• Intel Pentium processor or equivalent AMD
• 2GB RAM
• 1GB hard disk space for SpecView and related
utilities
• Additional disk space for datalogging
• Display adapter capable of operating at 1024 x
768 pixels and at least 16-bit color
• 2 USB ports
• A CD-ROM drive
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
100
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
6
Com pany
101
l
e
r
4871 Process Controller
The 4871 Process Controller combines the
following components into a single control
system:
Control Module:
• Honeywell HC900 Hybrid Controller.
Flexible, Powerful Software:
• SpecView SCADA software.
• System set up with graphical user interface
configured to individual requirements.
Power Controller:
• 4875 or 4876 Power Controllers for handling
heating, cooling, safety, and motor control
devices.
T
he 4871 Process Controller has been developed to provide an integrated stand alone
control system for controlling either a single
reactor with multiple feed and product controls
or multiple reactors operating independently or
in parallel. The 4871 is the ideal choice for all
of Parr Instrument Company’s custom systems,
including: tubular reactors, multiple reactor
systems (both batch and cascade systems),
continuous flow stirred reactors, and fluidized
bed reactors.
Control Module
The control module of the Parr 4871 Process
Controller is a Honeywell HC900 Hybrid
Controller. This controller combines analog
and logic control into a versatile, cost-effective
controller designed specifically for process applications requiring analog measurement combined
with programmable control actions.
Function
Analog Input (AI) Maximum Channels
Analog Output (AO) Maximum Channels
Digital I/O Maximum Channels
Remote I/O
Control Loops
Logic Scan
Loop Scan
Ethernet Communications
Peer to Peer Communications
Modbus Master
Modbus Slave
On-line Programming
Function Blocks
Sequential Functions
E-mail Alarms
480
200
1920
Yes
Per Memory
25-50 ms
500 ms
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2000
Yes
Yes
Input / Output
The controller is adapted to each user’s
requirements by adding to the control chassis input and output modules. Each module
provides for between four and sixteen individual
inputs or outputs fully isolated from one another.
These modules include:
Input Modules: The analog inputs are of universal type and are most commonly used for thermocouple or RTD temperature sensors, strain
gage type pressure transducers, and similar
devices with mV, V, or resistance inputs. Input
isolation, cold junction compensation, and burnout protection are incorporated into the circuitry.
Each analog input module provides for eight
separate inputs.
Process Flow Diagram for stirred reactor system.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
4871 Process Controller
The digital inputs can be
logic inputs or contact closures.
These are typically used for
sensing valve positions or conditions of safety devices. Each
digital input module provides
for sixteen separate inputs.
Output Modules: The analog
outputs are 0-20 mA. A suitable
dropping resistor can be used
to convert this to 0-5 or 0-10
VDC. Analog outputs are commonly used to set stirrer motor
operating speeds, position control valves, or drive mass flow
controllers or pumps. Each
analog output module is capable of controlling four separate
devices or functions.
The digital outputs are
open collector type capable of
sinking up to 300 mA . They
are commonly used to control
heaters, solenoid valves for
cooling or other flow control,
system safety shut down,
visual and/or audible alarms,
and similar devices. Each digital output module is capable
of controlling sixteen separate
devices or functions.
PC Graphical
User Interface
Data Logging
Multipl 4871 Controllers can be
interfaced by a single PC operating
the SpecView software.
Temperature
Pressure
Stirrer Speed
Flow Rate
Parr 4871
Process
Controller
Alarms
Safety Links
Other
Multiple 4875 or 4876 Power Control
Controllers can be controlled, with
individually isolated inputs and outputs, with one 4871 Process Controller.
Heating Control
Control Loops
Cooling Control
Parr
The controller can provide
4875/4876
Stirrer Control
Power
any number of PID or ON/OFF
Controllers
control loops, limited solely by
Safety Interlock
the available CPU memory.
The PID control algorithm
includes auto-tuning and fuzzy
logic overshoot suppression for
each control loop. For heating
4871 Process Controller Input/Output Diagram.
and cooling control, the PID
control loops provide time
proportioning of the associated
digital output.
Set Point Programming
Many temperature control applications utilize
Ramp/Soak profiles for controlling the entire
two separate time proportioning ouputs with
process of a reactor can be written using the
one PID controller; one for heating and one for
set point profiler incorporated into the control
cooling.
firmware. A single profile may be from 2 to 50
Control loops can be linked together to
segments in length.
provide cascade, feed forward or ratio control for
A typical profile might be a ramp and soak
difficult or advanced control applications.
of the reactor temperature but, in addition, the
Both high and low limit values can be entered
analog and digital outputs can be tied to the basic
for each control loop to sound alarms or initiate
profile to start and stop flows, activate stirrers
safety control schemes.
or accessories, or change alarms. Any of the set
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
102
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
6
Com pany
103
l
e
r
points within the profile can be protected with the
set point guarantee function that assures that the
process variable will be within the entered limits
before the profile can proceed.
The number of set point programmers is limited by the amount of available memory in
the controller CPU. Typically, at least eight separate profiles can be running simultaneously. For
example, eight reactors can be running a unique
program at the same time.
While a maximum of 99 profiles can be stored
in the controller itself, an unlimited number can
be stored in the operator’s PC for rapid transfer
to the controller.
In addition to the set point profiling capability,
the controller is also equipped with a set point
scheduling function. This feature can operate up
to 8 profiles operating on a common time base.
The 4871 Controller includes Operational
Sequence Control
The sequence control function offered by the
4871 Controller greatly expands the capabilities
of this control for users who wish to control
reactor systems. The operation of valves,
pumps and other peripheral devices can be
programmed on either a time or an event driven
basis. Sequences can be very simple timed
events or they can be very complex with multiple
nested default sequences programmed to occur
only if process feedback indicates a need to take
alternative actions.
Communications Channels
Each 4871 Controller is equipped with an
RS-485 and Ethernet communication ports. The
RS-485 port is used for initial configuration
and communications setup. The Ethernet port
provides communication with the host PC when
using the SpecView GUI program. Multiple
controllers, each with a unique address, can be
networked on the Ethernet interface with a single
connection to the PC.
The principal advantage of the Ethernet
interface is that it allows the user to use an
existing network infrastructure to connect the
controller to the PC. As a result, one can operate
the controller over the network from anywhere
within your facility. Additionally, internet access
from remote locations becomes possible. This
type of connectivity offers unique possibilities,
for example, related to remote diagnostics and
system troubleshooting.
Process Flow Diagram for a tubular reactor with real-time process renderings.
Screenshot of a 4871 Controller user interface for automated control of a tubular
reactor system.
Three Models Available
Parr 4871 Process Controllers are available
in three different models to cover a wide range
of applications. The 4871A will accept four I/O
modules (typically up to 36 inputs and outputs).
The 4871B will accept up to eight I/O modules,
and the 4871C will accept up to twelve I/O modules. If more than 100 inputs and outputs are
required, multiple controllers can be linked.
4871 Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
4871A
12.86
4871B
16.98
4871C
29.78
Height, in.
15.12
21.56
21.56
Depth, in.
11.00
13.00
13.00
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
4871 Process Controller
Current Industrial Standards
Modbus, Ethernet, auto-tuning, fuzzy logic,
auto-configuring Man Machine Interface (MMI),
supervisory control and data acquisition
(SCADA), multi-loop control; these are a few
of the terms and capabilities designed into the
hardware and software incorporated into the
Parr 4871 controller.
This modern and powerful package enables
Parr to configure and build turnkey systems
within weeks of order at very attractive prices.
Screenshot from remote PC showing logged data in Data Logging Mode.
SpecView SCADA Sofware
SpecView describes their product as
“Software for people with other jobs”. That
seems to be an excellent description of this software package used with the 4871 Controller to:
• Interface with the control package
• Develop the graphical screen layout
• Establish the data logging profiles
• Prepare custom reports
• Create bar graphs
• Generate time trend graphs
• Monitor alarms
• Create flexible recipes
• Retrieve and replace logged data
• Operate the reactor system(s).
The full software package, not just a run-time
version, is supplied with the 4871 Controller
so operators can enhance their system as their
needs change or expand/change their applications. Download a demo at www.specview.com.
Graphical User Interface
An integral part of the Honeywell Controller
is the hybrid control designer software. This is
the “Drag and Drop” software that enables Parr
to rapidly establish the controller’s internal logic
and adapt it to individual systems requirements.
The user can employ this same software to
change or enhance the fundamental logic of the
controller as additional components are added
to the system or as functions need to change.
PC Requirements
In most laboratory and pilot plant applications, a PC will be used for the operator
interface. A touch screen interface is also available. For plant or production applications, an
industrial type user interface box with a color
graphic LCD is available.
The PC used with the 4871 serves several
functions. It is the operator’s user interface for
controlling the process. It also logs all of the
operating data generated during a process run.
It can also store multiple setups for rapid transfer
to the 4871 Process CPU.
Any modern PC with current Windows operating system can be used with these controllers.
It is important to note that the control of
the process always resides within the 4871
Controller, and not in the PC itself.
Power Controllers
Parr designs, builds and furnishes power
controllers to adapt the analog and digital outputs from the 4871 Controllers to the reactors or
systems being controlled. These power controllers handle all of the high current power circuits
so that the control circuitry is isolated from these
loads. This also makes it possible to install the
controller in a control room some distance from
the system being controlled.
Each 4871 Controller will be specified and
assembled to match the user’s intended application. These applications can vary from a single
reactor with full process control to eight reactors
operating in parallel. The 4871 Process Controller
connects to a customer-supplied PC with a current Windows Operating System.
Please contact a Parr Customer Service
Representative to discuss configuring a 4871
Process Controller to your specific application.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
104
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
R
e
a
c
t
o
r
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
l
e
r
s
6
4876 Power Controller
The 4875 Power Controller module is flexible and can be
used in remote locations from the system being controlled.
Back panel for 4876 Power Controller
4876 Power Controller
The 4876 Power Controller is equipped with
three solid state relays, three lockout relays, and
a single motor control. It is used with the 4871
to control up to three separate heaters and one
motor. It can only be used in 230V systems.
4875 Power Controller back panel for 230V model.
4875 Power Controller
The power controller(s) will be designed for
each individual system, but as an example, a
4875 Power Controller includes:
1. A solid-state relay sized to handle the current
drawn by the vessel heater. This is commonly
a 25-amp relay with its protective fuses.
2. A solid-state relay sized to drive a solenoid
valve to control the flow of cooling water to
the vessel.
3. A motor speed controller that converts the
analog output signal from the controller to the
electrical signal required to drive the specific
stirrer motor. A circuit breaker for the motor is
also provided.
4. A lockout relay to shut down the heater circuit
should an alarm condition be detected.
5. Status lights for the principal functions.
6. Connections of appropriate style for the
power input and device outputs.
4875 Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
4875
9.40
Height, in.
5.00
Depth, in.
10.50
4876A Power Controller
The 4876A Power Controller is the same as
the 4876 described above but without motor
control capability.
4876 Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
4876
16.18
4876A
9.40
Height, in.
4.98
5.00
Depth, in.
13.00
10.50
4871 Ordering Guide
Each 4871 Controller will be specified and assembled to match
the user’s intended application. These applications can vary from a
single reactor with full process control to eight reactors operating
in parallel. The 4871 Process Controller connects to a customersupplied PC with a current Windows Operating System.
Please contact a Parr Customer Service Representative to
discuss configuring a 4871 Process Controller to your specific
application.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
105
4877 Valve Controller
The 4877 Valve Controller is used with the
4871 Process Controller to remotely actuate
valves. It requires a dry air supply.
4877 Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
Height, in.
Depth, in.
15.00
5.00
16.00
4877
(5-8 valves)
19.00
5.00
16.00
4877
(9-12 valves)
24.00
5.00
16.00
4877
(1-4 valves)
A2200E Mass Flow Controller
The A2200E Mass Flow Controller Box can be used to send a set
point and receive flow rate information from up to four MFCs. It is
a basic control box for use with distributed control systems. Users
needing more advanced features like PC communication and totalization should consider our 4871 Process Controller.
A2200E Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
A2200E
9.40
Height, in.
5.00
Depth, in.
10.50
A2110E Motor Controller
The A2110E Motor Controller is a stand alone
box which can be used for a single motor. It
may be equipped with a Motor Control Module
expansion for setpoint control of RPM. A version
of this controller with 4-20mA I/O capability for
integration into existing systems is available.
A2110E Dimensions
Model
Width, in.
A2110E
9.00
Height, in.
4.64
Depth, in.
13.00
This custom order is set up to run sixteen reactors, two 4871 Process Controllers,
with sixteen 4875 Power Controllers all through one PC.
Series 5000 Multi Reactor System (MRS): a six station multi-reactor system. Each reactor is equipped with it’s own constant pressure gas delivery system. The 4871 Controller maintains all of the
important system parameters, including temperature and stirring
speed, and records the gas consumption of each of the reactors.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
106
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Chapter 7
Optional
Fittings
Inside this chapter you will find:
HEATER OPTIONS
STIRRER MOTORS AND DRIVES
STIRRER OPTIONS
GAS ENTRAINMENT
CATALYST BASKETS
CONDENSERS
SAFETY RUPTURE DISCS
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
PRESSURE GAGES
GAS MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
HIGH PRESSURE BURETTES
LIQUID CHARGING SYSTEMS
METERING PUMPS
LIQUID PIPETTES
SOLIDS CHARGING SYSTEMS
COOLING COILS
CYLINDER LINERS
SAMPLE COLLECTION VESSELS
BOTTOM DRAIN VALVES
VALVES AND FITTINGS
THERMOCOUPLES
PRESSURE HOSES
EQUIPMENT FOR USE IN POTENTIALLY
IGNITABLE ATMOSPHERES
WINDOWS
INSULATED ELECTRICAL GLANDS
SPARE PARTS KITS
TEMPERATURE LIMITS
EXTERNAL VALVES AND FITTINGS
Heaters
arr has designed standard electrical heaters for all of the reactors in our product line. Different types of heaters are used for
individual reactors to best meet the operational needs, heating
load, and expected operating temperatures. The standard heater
type and power rating for each reactor model is listed in the reactor specification tables.
P
Standard Heaters
Clamp-On Band Heaters
These are normally used
for very small reactors where
maximum watt densities and
heat transfer are required due
to the limited surface area
available on the vessel.
Rigid Heating Mantles.
These are quartz fabric
mantles housed in aluminum
shells. They are used for
moderate sized reactors in
designs where the heater can
be moved on or off the vessel.
They are light weight and easy
to handle, but they are not
used to support the weight
of the vessel and they are
generally limited to operating
temperatures of 350 °C or less.
Calrod-Type Sheathed
Element Heaters.
These are rugged heaters
with Calrod-type elements
held within a metal shell. They
are used for medium to large
reactors for operating temperatures to 350 °C. In some cases
the heater shell itself forms a
part of the reactor support. An
advantage of Calrod heaters is
that the heating elements are
easily replaceable.
Ceramic Heaters.
These are special purpose
heaters with an electric element
embedded in a shaped ceramic
body which is held within an
insulated metal housing. They
are used for reactors designed
for temperatures to 600 °C and
for large multi-zone heaters.
Optional and Custom
Heaters.
Parr offers a variety of
heater designs which can be
substituted for the standard
heater normally furnished with
each reactor. Most of these
can also be used with Parr
non-stirred pressure vessels as
well. The principal features and
recommended applications for
these heaters are described
below.
Aluminum Block Heaters.
Aluminum block heaters
are available as an option for
vessels of two gallons or less.
These heaters are machined
from solid blocks of aluminum
with heater wells machined
into the walls of the block.
Optional cooling channels are
also available.
Aluminum block heaters
have distinct features that
make them desirable for certain
applications. When compared
to a circulating jacket, they
offer the convenience of direct
electric heat control as well as
no plumbing requirements for
hot oil. The heating elements,
cooling channels, and associated wiring are embedded
within the machined aluminum
enclosure. This allows for
even heat distribution, physical isolation of the electrical
connections, and rapid cooling
when needed. These attributes,
in combination with a surface
temperature limiting device
and proper external wiring,
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
108
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
109
i
n
g
have allowed these heaters
to be used in some potentially ignitable atmospheres
(Hazardous Locations). Having
integral machined cooling
channels, aluminum block
heaters have also been used
for control of some exothermic
reactions when internal cooling
is not available.
Flexible Heating Mantles.
These can be furnished for
many different applications.
These are similar to the rigid
type described above except
they are not held in an aluminum housing. They have a
flexible fabric outer case for
electrical and thermal insulation. This type of mantle is
particularly useful for heating
vessels with irregular shapes,
such as those with windows
in the cylinder wall, since they
are flexible and can be split
and laced onto a vessel around
any external protrusion. As
with rigid mantles, they will
produce temperatures up to
350 °C, but they are limited to
watt densities of 10 watts per
square inch. This type of heater
can be made to cover any of
the vessels offered by Parr, and
they are sometimes preferred
when only moderate temperatures are required. Since they
are constructed of cloth, an
electrical ground wire cannot
be provided.
Circulation Jackets.
A jacket can be welded to
the outer wall of most Parr
pressure vessels to provide a
means for heating or cooling
the vessel with a hot or cold
liquid or steam. This type
of heating is ideal for users
who want to duplicate plant
operating conditions, using a
jacketed reactor comparable
to jacketed equipment used
in their plant. Since there are
no electrical components in a
jacket, and since the maximum
temperature can be controlled
by controlling the temperature
of the heating medium, a
jacketed vessel may be a good
option for use in hazardous
atmospheres.
Rapid and uniform heating
can be attained with a jacketed
vessel since the heating
medium is in direct contact
with the vessel. By controlling the temperature of the
heating medium, temperature
overshoots can be avoided
when working with sensitive
materials. Standard jackets
are designed for operating
pressures up to 100 psig (7 bar)
within the jacket. Higher pressure jackets can be provided
if required.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Stirrer Motors and Drives
Torque vs. Stirring Speed
he standard, open-type,
variable speed motor
installed on each Parr reactor
will produce stirring speeds
from zero to between 600
and 800 rpm with a torque
adequate to drive the installed
impellers in average viscosity
mixtures. Higher horsepower
motors and special stirrers can
be provided for higher viscosities. Alternate drive pulleys are
available to produce higher
stirring speeds, but several
basic rules must be considered
when changing any of these
components.
The highest torque from
any motor is obtained at lower
stirring speeds. Increasing
the stirring speed reduces the
torque in inverse proportion
to the speed. For operations
involving high viscosity
T
mixtures, the motor size, the
type of impeller and the stirring speed must be matched
to provide an effective mixing
system.
As a general rule, the magnetic coupling installed on each
Parr reactor will have a torque
rating considerably higher than
the torque obtainable from the
motors offered for use with
that apparatus. The goal is to
make the motor the weak link
so that the magnetic stirrer will
be protected. Reference torque
rating for applicable magnetic
drive.
Explosionproof Motors
Explosionproof motors
designed for Class I, Groups
C and D and Class II, Groups
F and G with variable speed
control can be furnished for
most Parr reactors.
Flameproof “d” Motors
ATEX certified AC
Flameproof Motors designed
for use with group IIC gases
are available for all of Parr’s
stirred reactors. These inverter
duty motors are available with
simple variable frequency
drives for control of the stirring
speed. Please consult Parr for
any specific ATEX certification
related requirements.
Air Motors
Air-driven motors can be
installed on most reactors. The
horsepower rating, torque, and
available speed are all dependent upon the pressure and
available volume of the driving
air source. Maximum torques
are delivered at relatively
slow speeds and maximum
horsepower is delivered at
high speed.
Stirrer Drive Motors
Standard Pulley
Optional Pulley
Motor
Designation
HP (kW)
Rating
Hazardous
Location*
Variable
Speed
Type
Max
Speed,
RPM**
Max
Torque,
in-lb
Max
Speed,
RPM**
Max
Torque,
in-lb
-VS.12
1/16 (0.05)
No
Yes
PMDC
600
6.75
1700
2.25
-VS.25
1/4 (0.18)
No
Yes
PMDC
600
27
9
-XP.25
1/4 (0.18)
Class I, Div. 1 & 2
Groups C & D, E & F
Yes
PMDC
600
27
9
-XP.25X
1/4 (0.18)
Ex 2G de IIC T4
Yes
Inverter Duty
Constant Torque
AC
450
33
1350
11
-AM.25**
1/4 (0.18)***
Ex II 2 GD c T4
Yes
Air
1000***
30
—
—
-VS.50
1/2 (0.37)
No
Yes
PMDC
600
54
1700
18
-XP.50
1/2 (0.37)
Class I, Div. 1 & 2
Groups C & D, E & F
Yes
PMDC
600
54
1700
18
-XP.50X
1/2 (0.37)
Ex 2G Ex de IIC T4
Yes
Inverter Duty
Constant Torque
AC
450
66
1350
22
-AM.50**
1/2 (0.37)***
Ex II 2 GD c T4
Yes
Air
1000***
66***
—
—
-VS.75
3/4 (0.55)
No
Yes
PMDC
600
81
1700
27
3/4 (0.55)
Class I, Div. 1 & 2
Groups C & D, E & F
Yes
Yes
600
81
1700
27
-XP.75
Values represented are nominal.
*For more information on Hazardous Locations information see Tech Note 230.
**Maximum speed values based on “no load”
***HP, RPM, and torque values for air motors are based on a 40 psi supply capable of 34 cfm for the AM.50 and 10 cfm for the AM.25.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
110
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
111
i
n
g
Geared, Direct Drive Motors
A geared, direct drive motor
can be installed on most fixed
head floor stand reactors. This
is an attractive arrangement for
handling heavy stirring loads.
Any 1/4 hp or larger,
variable-speed standard or
explosionproof motor can
be used. Gear box drives are
available with ratios of 3:1, 5:1
and 10:1. The 1700 rpm maximum speed will be reduced
in an amount determined by
the reduction ratio of the gear
box, and the associated torque
values from the table will be
increased in the same ratio.
Parr Geared Drive Motor mounted on a Series 4553 Stirred Reactor System.
Gear Box Torques
3:1 Gear Box
5:1 Gear Box
10:1 Gear Box
Motor HP
Rating
Max Speed,
RPM
Max Torque,
in-lb
Max Speed,
RPM
Max Torque,
in-lb
Max Speed,
RPM
Max Torque,
in-lb
1/4
600
27
360
45
180
90
1/2
600
54
360
90
180
180
3/4
600
81
360
135
Not Recommended
Contact Parr for ATEX Gear Box.
Magnetic Drive
Description
Maximum Torque, in-lb
General Purpose
16
Footless General Purpose
16
Heavy Duty
60
Footless Heavy Duty
60
Extra Heavy Duty
120
Footless Extra Heavy Duty
120
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Stirrer Options
Turbine Type Impellers
arr reactors are usually equipped with turbine type impellers
which produce an excellent mixing action over the range of
stirring speeds at which these reactors typically operate. These
impellers are made in four-blade and six-blade styles, with the
smaller four-blade impellers used only on Micro and Mini Reactors.
These impellers, for reactors with 300 mL volume or greater, may
be positioned anywhere on the stirring shaft, with one impeller
usually located near the bottom of the vessel to keep solids up in
suspension and a second impeller positioned near the base of the
vortex to pull reactant gases down into the liquid phase. These
impellers generally provide excellent mixing for systems with
effective viscosities up to approximately 25,000 centipoise (cP) with
a 16 in-lb magnetic drive or up to 50,000 cP with 60 in-lb magnetic
drive.
P
Turbine Type Impeller
Anchor Stirrer with
Wiper Blades
Anchor Stirrer
Paddle Type Anchor
Anchor Stirrers
Anchor stirrers are available in several configurations for use
with moderate to high viscosity materials. This type of stirrer usually works best in vessels with an inside depth to diameter ratio
of 1.5 to 1 or less. They are intended to operate at relatively slow
speeds and generally require a heavy duty drive system capable of
generating and delivering sufficient torque to the agitator. Footless
magnetic drives work well with anchor or spiral stirrers.
Three basic types are offered:
1. A U-shaped, flat bar anchor.
2. A flat blade, paddle type anchor.
3. A two-arm or three-arm, self centering anchor with PTFE
wiper blades.
Spiral Stirrers
Spiral stirrers are offered in two styles: stamped and machined.
The standard spiral stirrer includes blades constructed of stamped
sheet metal and provides a cost-effective option. The more robust
machined spiral stirrer is manufactured from a solid piece of bar
stock which results in added strength and facilitates cleaning.
Either of these spiral stirrers can be installed in any 1 liter, 2
liter or 1 gallon reactor to produce a positive downward thrust
or upward thrust action when working with viscous polymers or
other high viscosity mixtures. They work best in floor stand reactors with adjustable speed and heavy duty drive systems. Either
left-hand (downward thrust) or right hand (upward thrust) spirals
are available. The downward thrust spiral is generally preferred for
heavy suspensions.
Note:
All stirrer options may not be appropriate or available for each
reactor size. Additional internal fittings may be required to adapt
some stirrer styles to existing reactors in the field. Please contact
the Parr Technical Service Department for assistance in selecting a
stirrer suitable for the intended operating volume and viscosities.
Spiral Stirrer
Machined Spiral Stirrer
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
112
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
113
i
n
g
Gas Entrainment Impellers
arr offers a series of gas
entrainment impellers
for users who want to obtain
maximum gas dispersion
into a liquid system. This is
obtained with a unique impeller attached to a hollow stirring
shaft through which gases
are continuously recirculated
from the head space above
the liquid through the impeller
into the liquid phase. As with
all impellers, the speed of the
stirrer creates a vacuum at the
tip of the impeller. Gas enters
openings near the top of the
shaft and is pulled through
dispersion ports located at the
tips of the impellers. In the
Parr system with dispersion
ports located at the very tips
of the impellers, the higher the
stirring speed — the higher the
vacuum — and the higher the
driving force for this very effective gas dispersion system.
These impellers are offered
as a complete package which
includes the impeller, the hollow shaft with coupling, and
any required foot bearings and
brackets for the intended reaction. The baffles are a separate
option which must be ordered
individually.
The gas entrainment stirrers
may be ordered as an optional
stirrer when purchasing a
new reactor system or easily
installed in an existing system
in the field. With the wide
variety of reactor head styles
and magnetic stirrers furnished
on Parr reactors it is best to
contact us with the numbers
stamped on the head of your
vessel so that we will be able
to furnish the correct gas
entrainment assembly for a
particular reactor system.
P
Gas Entrainment Impeller
Since these gas entrainment
impellers operate best in the
1000-1200 rpm range, users
will want to ensure that their
stirrer drive system is set up to
deliver these operating speeds;
alternate pulleys and belts are
available to convert existing
reactor systems.
Baffles
Because it is the relative
speed of the tip of the impeller
to the liquid phase that governs the mass transfer, baffles,
which impede the rotation of
the liquid with the impeller,
can greatly enhance the operation of these gas entrainment
impellers. While some natural
baffling is provided by the
internal thermowell, dip tube
and cooling coils, the removable baffles are recommended
for use with these gas entrainment impellers. These baffles
may also be beneficial with
the more traditional turbine
type impellers for certain
applications.
Gas Entrainment Impeller with Hollow Shaft
Removeable Baffle Set
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Catalyst Baskets
atalyst baskets can be provided for holding a supported
catalyst so that it will not be destroyed or changed by the stirring action of the impeller. These can be installed in reactors with
volumes ranging from 300 to 2000 mL. Two interchangeable styles
are available. Special heads, internal cooling coils, thermowells
and dip tubes are required to provide clear space in the vessel for
these baskets.
C
The Static Design
In the static design the mesh basket holding the catalyst
remains stationary while impellers on the stirring shaft and baffles
outside of the basket direct the flow of reactants over the surface
of the contained catalyst. A unique gas entrainment impeller provides a uniform flow of both gas and liquid over the fixed catalyst
bed held within the annular basket. The Parr design for these
baskets includes a rigid bottom support which permits high speed
stirring without excessive vibration. Cooling coils, internal temperature measurements, and liquid and gas sampling operations
can be continued as usual without interference from the installed
catalyst basket.
The Dynamic Design
In the dynamic design the catalyst is held in an annular shaped,
mesh basket which is attached to the stirrer drive in place of the
stirring shaft. The rotating basket then serves as an impeller for
stirring the reactants. Fixed baffles and coaxial impellers ensure
good circulation over the surface of the contained catalyst. The
dynamic baskets are available for reactors with volumes of 1000,
1800, and 2000 mL. Dynamic baskets must be installed in reactors
equipped with at least 1/4 hp motors to ensure that sufficient
stirrer torque and speeds are available for proper operation.
Dynamic baskets are interchangeable with static baskets in 1 liter
and larger vessels.
Catalyst Basket Static Design
Catalyst Basket Static Design with Uniflow Stirrer
Catalyst Basket Dynamic Design
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
114
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
115
i
n
g
Condensers
arr offers two styles of condensers for attachment to
the head of a stirred reactor or
pressure vessel. These can be
made in various sizes to match
the size of the reactor.
P
Reflux Condenser
The reflux condenser
consists of a length of tubing
connected directly to the head
of a vessel and equipped
with a water cooling jacket.
Condensed vapors are returned
directly to the vessel and any
non-condensable gases can
be released through a needle
valve at the top of the condenser. A helical insert in the
condenser ensures maximum
effectiveness in a rather short
length.
Reflux/Take-Off Condensers
The reflux/take-off condenser consists of a water
jacketed tube, the same as
described above, assembled
with a receiving vessel
attached to the lower end of
the condenser. Any vapor, such
as water from a polymerization
reaction, can be condensed and
collected in the receiver, from
which it can be withdrawn
through a bottom valve. Any
non-condensable gases can
be released through a needle
valve at the top of the condenser. If condensate collection
is not required, the receiver can
be removed and the condenser
can be mounted directly above
the reactor for direct reflux into
the vessel.
Modifications
Many users opt to install a
ball valve at the head of the reactor below the condenser to use
as a shut-off to the condenser.
Alternate collection vessel volumes are available upon request.
The installation of a condenser on any of the Parr
reactors requires a larger port in
the head of the vessel, the size of
which will vary with the volume
of the reactor system. Due to
the limited space on the 4560
mini reactors we would change
either the gage opening or one
of the cooling coil ports to 1/4"
NPT for use with a condenser.
This modification would then
either combine the gage and
condenser functions or eliminate
the internal cooling loop to
accommodate the condenser.
Reactors with volumes of 1 liter
and greater would be modified
with a 3/8" NPT opening or
larger depending on the reactor
volume. The standard head
fittings would be rearranged to
accommodate this port.
Reflux
Condenser
Reflux Take-Off
Condenser
Condensers
Reactor
Style
Note
Inner Tube
Diameter, in.
Standard
Receiver, mL
4560 / 4590
Reflux/Take-off
Mod. Gage Opening 1/4" NPT
1/4
150
4560 / 4590
Reflux
Mod. Gage Opening 1/4" NPT
1/4
4560
Reflux/Take-off
Mod. Cool Coil Opening 1/4" NPT
1/4
4560
Reflux
Mod. Cool Coil Opening 1/4" NPT
1/4
4520 / 4530 / 4550
Reflux/Take-off
3/8" NPT
3/8
4520 / 4530 / 4550
Reflux
3/8" NPT
3/8
4530
Reflux/Take-Off
3/8" NPT
3/8
4530
Reflux
3/8" NPT
3/8
4540 / 4570 / 4580
Reflux/Take-off
3/8" NPT
3/8
4540 / 4570 / 4580
Reflux
3/8" NPT
3/8
4555
Reflux/Take-off
1/2" NPT
3/4
4555
Reflux
1/2" NPT
3/4
Part No.
A2011HC
A2012HC
150
A2013HC
A2014HC
300
A2001HC
A2002HC
300
A2003HC
A2004HC
300
A2016HC
A2017HC
1000
A2018HC
A2019HC
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Safety Rupture Discs
1/4" NPT (M)
Orifice Ring
Rupture Disc
Orifice Cone
A888HC2 Rupture
Disc Assembly
arr Pressure Vessels are protected by
custom built rupture discs furnished by
Fike® Corporation, a specialist in this exotic art.
Examination of these discs will indicate that
each of these discs is domed. This dome was
produced at the factory by taking the individual
disc to 70% of its burst pressure.
ASME as well as other pressure vessel codes
dictate that pressure vessels must be equipped
with a rupture disc designed to burst no higher
than the design pressure of the vessel. For
pressure loads that do not cycle rapidly such as
in our vessels, Fike suggests limiting the actual
operating pressure to no more than 90% of the
disc burst pressure. This combination will limit
operating pressures to no more than 90% of the
design pressure of the vessel.
P
Typical Rupture Discs for 1/4" Orifice
We have selected alloy 600 as the standard
material for these rupture discs. It provides
excellent corrosion resistance while retaining
over 90% of its room temperature rating at
temperatures up to 450 °C. For added corrosion
resistance we can furnish these discs with gold
facing or replace them with discs made of Alloy
C-276. Discs can be produced to match any operating pressure and temperature above the stated
minimums.
Parr reactors and pressure vessels from
25 mL to 2000 mL use the 526HC alloy 600 disc
or 581HC alloy 600 with gold facing. The 1 gallon
and larger use the 708HC series discs. The 4580
reactor systems use the 1415HC series discs.
In general, the 1000 psi disc in the
526HC/581HC series discs and the 800 psi in
the 708HC are the lowest available ranges in
the alloy 600 material. Alternate disc materials
are available but they do not offer the same
corrosion resistant properties and temperature
capabilities.
For applications where users prefer a lower
range pressure gage, we would add a spring
loaded relief valve set to protect the gage and a
1000 psi rupture disc as the fail safe protection.
Safety Rupture Discs
Most rupture discs furnished by Parr come
with CE certification. Upon request, Parr can
furnish ½” discs with flat seat (both holder and
rupture disc) with ASME certification markings and documentation (with UD certification
designator).
Users are invited to contact the Parr Technical
Support Staff with requirements for special
rupture discs.
Typical Rupture Discs for 1/2" Orifice
Burst Rating, psig
Inconel Disc
Gold-Faced Inconel Disc
Burst Rating, psig
Inconel Disc
1000
526HCPD
581HCPD
1000
708HCP10CT
2000
526HCPF
581HCPF
1500
708HCP15CT
3000
526HCPG
581HCPG
2000
708HCP20CT
4000
526HCP40CT
581HCP40CT
3000
708HCP30CT
5000
526HCPH
581HCPH
3000
1415HCP30CT
8000
526HCPJ
581HCPJ
4500
1415HCP45CT
10000
526HCP100CT
Note: For a complete list of rupture disc part numbers, burst ranges, materials, and
temperature ratings, see manual 231M.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
116
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
Pressure Relief Valves
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
i
n
g
s
7
Gages
pring-loaded relief valves should be viewed
as supplements and not substitutes for a
safety rupture disc. The rupture disc is the primary means for protection of the operator and
the vessel in case of accidental over-pressure.
Spring-loaded relief valves can be added to a
reactor or vessel to:
• Relieve pressures near the maximum
operating pressure.
• Reseal once excess pressure has been
relieved.
• Protect low pressure components at pressures below available rupture disc ranges.
S
593HCPF Gage
3-1/2" Dia.
The relief valves listed below can be installed
on any Parr vessel. The relief valves are
constructed of stainless steel and have FKM
O-rings. Other valve and O-ring materials are
available on special order. Relief valves with CE
Certification are also available.
2633HCP10AD 3-1/2" Back Mount Gage
56HCPF Gage
4-1/2" Dia.
ages for Parr pressure
vessels can be furnished
with either 3-1/2" or 4-1/2" dials
in any of the ranges shown in
the table below. All have stainless steel Bourdon tubes and
1/4" NPT male connections.
Alloy 400 gages are
available on special order.
Accuracy is 1.0 percent of
full scale for the 4-1/2" size
and 1 percent for the 3-1/2"
gages. All are calibrated in
both pounds per square inch
G
A175VB
Relief Valve
A140VB2
Relief Valve
Pressure Relief Valves for Low Pressures
Part No.
Preset
psi
Adjustable
psi
Bar
Discharge
Connection
A140VB2PA
100
50-150
3.45-10.3
1/4" NPT (M)
A140VB2P1
150
50-150
3.45-10.3
1/4" NPT (M)
A140VB2P2
145
50-150
3.45-10.3
1/4" NPT (M)
A140VB2PB
200
150-350
10.3-24.1
1/4” NPT (M)
A140VB2PC
600
350-600
24.1-41.4
1/4” NPT (M)
A140VB2PD
300
150-350
10.3-24.1
1/4” NPT (M)
Pressure Relief Valves for High Pressures
Part No.
Pressure Relief
Range, psi
Bar
Discharge
Connection
A175VB
750-1500
52-103
1/4" NPT (F)
A175VB2
1500-2250
103-155
1/4” NPT (F)
A175VB3
2250-3000
155-207
1/4” NPT (F)
A175VB4
3000-4000
207-276
1/4” NPT (F)
A175VB5
4000-5000
276-345
1/4” NPT (F)
(psi) and bar. Gages in Pascal
units are available on special
order. Compound gages which
show vacuum to 30 inches of
Mercury and positive pressures
to 300 psi (20 bar) are also
available.
When ordering a special
gage, specify the gage diameter, the desired range and
scale units.
The gage on a pressure
vessel should be 150 percent
of the maximum operating
pressure. This allows the gage
to operate in the most accurate
pressure range and prevents
the gage from being stressed
repeatedly to its full range,
which will effect the calibration.
Gages
Pressure,
psi
Range,
bar
4-1/2" Dia.
Gage No.
3-1/2" Dia.
Gage No.
3-1/2" Dia. Back
Mount Gage No.
0-100
0-14
56HCPA
593HCP1AD
2633HCP1AD
0-200
0-28
56HCPB
593HCP2AD
2633HCP2AD
0-600
0-40
56HCPC
593HCP6AD
2633HCP6AD
0-1000
0-70
56HCPD
593HCPD
2633HCP10AD
0-2000
0-137
56HCPF
593HCPF
2633HCP20AD
0-3000
0-210
56HCG
593HCPG
2633HCP30AD
0-4000
0-280
NA
593HCP40AD
—
0-5000
0-350
56HCPH
593HCP50AD
2633HCP50AD
A175VB7
350-750
24-52
1/4” NPT (F)
A175VB7CH
(Hast C)
350-750
24-52
1/4” NPT (F)
0-7500
0-517
56HCP75AD
NA
2633HCP75AD
A175VB8
50-350
3.4-24.1
1/4” NPT (F)
0-10000
0-700
56HCPK
593HCPK
—
A175VB8CH
(Hast C)
50-350
3.4-24.1
1/4” NPT (F)
30" Hg Vac/300 psi
56HCP3YB
593HCP3YB
2633HCP3YB
* Note: When ordering any of the above relief valves, the user
may specify a desired set pressure.
Parr’s standard stainless steel reactor gages are typically manufactured to meet
ASME/ANSI B40.1 Grade A accuracy specifications.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
117
Gas Measurement Systems
arr offers a variety of
accessories for its line
of pressure reaction vessels
to enable the investigator
to accurately determine the
amount of gas consumed in a
reaction conducted at elevated
pressures and temperatures.
There are essentially two
methods used to measure the
amount of gas delivered to a
reaction vessel. These are:
1. The measurement of the
pressure drop in an auxiliary supply vessel of known
volume.
2. The measurement and
integration of the flow
rates using an electronic
mass flow meter.
P
Each of these methods has
its advantages and limitations
as discussed below.
Intermediate Supply Tanks
Certainly the simplest
method to measure the
amount of gas consumed in a
reaction is to feed the gas from
a vessel of known volume
and to measure the pressure
drop in this vessel during the
course of the reaction. The
consideration in this method
is to select a supply vessel
with a volume matched to the
amount of gas that will be consumed in the reaction. It needs
to be large enough to contain
enough gas to complete the
reaction and small enough that
the pressure drop will be significant and measurable. This
basic technique can be applied
in a number of ways:
1. The supply tank can be
connected directly to the
reaction vessel. This is the
simplest and least expensive. The principal limitation
of this approach is that the
reaction pressure will fall
as gas is consumed and the
reaction will not be conducted at a constant pressure.
2. The supply tank can be
fitted with a constant
pressure regulator. The
regulator must be selected
to match the planned operating pressure. This regulator will deliver gas to the
reaction vessel at constant
pressure overcoming the
limitation described in (1)
above.
3. Initial and final pressures
in the supply tank can
be measured with analog
gages, or continuous pressure readings can be made
and recorded using pressure transducers. While the
transducers add cost, they
also add increased resolution and the opportunity to
follow the rate of the pressure drop and hence the
rate of reaction.
4. Enhanced precision can
be achieved by measuring
the temperature in the supply tank and applying corrections as appropriate.
Mass Flow
Parr Instrument Company
can provide mass flow meters
or controllers for quantitative
mass flow based analysis.
Mass flow controllers are mass
flow meters that incorporate
an integral control valve,
external valve, or feed pump
to control the fluid flow. Mass
flow controllers are typically
used in automated or semiautomated systems. Due to
many application and calibration specific requirements,
please contact Parr Instrument
Company for technical assistance with mass flow meters
or controllers.
Parr offers multiple, price
driven, electronic interface
devices for mass flow meters
and controllers. The Parr
A2200E Mass Flow Meter/
Controller interface system
offers a manually operated
readout and/or set point
module for up to four mass
flow meters/controllers. When
the A2200E is used with a
mass flow controller, a manually operated back pressure
regulator is required. The Parr
4871 Process Controller offers
remote set point, readout, data
logging, totalizing, gas mixing,
and process related interfaces
with these mass flow devices.
Other intermediate interfaces
can be provided.
Parr offers a series of high
pressure burettes in complete
packages for direct connection
to our reactors. The basic ones
are listed on the following
page.
These burettes can also be
equipped with digital pressure
transducers, internal thermocouples and data acquisition
and reduction support. Please
contact our customer support
group for information on these
possibilities.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
118
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
High Pressure Gas Burettes
arr offers a series of high
pressure burettes intended
to introduce gas (commonly
hydrogen) to a reactor at a
constant pressure. The burettes
consist of a high pressure
reservoir equipped with an
inlet valve, a pressure gage
and a relief valve. A constant
pressure regulator with a check
valve, a connecting hose and
a support stand are included
with each pipette.
The amount of gas consumed in a reaction can be
determined by knowing the
volume of the high pressure
reservoir and observing the
pressure drop in the reservoir
during a reaction.
P
p
Parr high pressure burettes
can be furnished in various
sizes as shown in the adjoining
table, each with a regulator to
deliver gas to the reactor over
the designated pressure range.
The moles of gas shown in the
table represent the amount of
hydrogen that will be held in
the burette at the maximum
pressure. The deliverable volume will be a function of the
difference in pressure between
the pipette and the reactor.
The size of the burette selected
should be large enough to
provide sufficient gas to complete the reaction while still
maintaining sufficient pressure
in the burette to force gas into
the reactor.
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
119
i
n
g
Reservoirs with larger
volumes are available as
are regulators with different
delivery ranges. Modifications
can be made to these basic
systems to add an internal
thermocouple to the reservoir
and/or a pressure transducer
for digital readout and/or
recording.
High Pressure Gas Burettes
Burette
Delivery Pressure Range
Volume, mL
Maximum
Pressure, psi
Total H2
Volume,
Moles
0-1800 psi
0-1200 psi
150
1800
0.8
A2280HC
A2280HC2
A2280HC3
300
1800
1.5
A2281HC
A2281HC2
A2281HC3
500
1800
2.6
A2282HC
A2282HC2
A2282HC3
1000
1800
5.1
A2283HC
A2283HC2
A2283HC3
0-700 psi
2250
1800
11.5
A2284HC
A2284HC2
A2284HC3
500
5000
7.1
A2285HC
A2285HC2
A2285HC3
A2283HC High Pressure Gas Burette
Liquid Charging Systems, (continued on next page)
Liquid Metering Pumps
iquid metering pumps are
commonly used to introduce liquids into a reactor or
vessel at elevated pressures
on a continuous basis. A wide
variety of pumps are available
to meet various pressure, flow,
and control requirements. The
pumps listed here cover some
of the more common pressure
and flow requirements associated with Parr reactors and
pressure vessels. The pumps
L
described under these catalog
numbers include an inlet filter,
a reverse-flow check valve
and the outlet tubing to the
reactor. Special pumps can
be furnished to meet requirements outside the range of
these pumps.
Liquid Metering Pumps
Part No.
Flow Rate,
mL/min
Pressure,
Max. psi
Wetted
Material
Remote
Control
0-10 VDC
A2286HC
0.01-10
2500
PEEK
No
A2287HC
0.01-10
5000
Stainless
No
A2288HC
0.04-40
1500
Stainless
No
A2289HC
0.01-10
5000
Stainless
Yes
A2290HC
0.04-40
1500
Stainless
Yes
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Liquid Charging Systems, cont.
Liquid Charging Pipettes
o introduce liquids into
reactors or vessels at
elevated pressures,
the most economical
way is to use
a pressure
pipette as a
secondary
vessel. These
are often used
for liquid addition
to a batch process.
Liquid is forced into the
reactor from the pipette
by applying gas pressure to the pipette
greater than the pressure within the vessel.
If the passages in the
connecting line are
large enough, slurries
or catalyst suspensions can also be
charged into the reacA2113HC
tor in this manner.
Liquid
Charging
The pipettes listed
Pipette
below offer a choice of
volumes and are rated
for pressures to 1800 psi.
They include a nitrogen
filling connection for
attachment to a nitrogen
tank. More elaborate
pipette systems can be
assembled to special order to
include additional fittings, such
as a pressure gage for the
pipette, a pressure relief valve
or a large opening ball valve.
Special pipettes can also be
furnished for higher pressures
to 5000 psi.
T
Liquid Charging Pipettes
Part No.
Pipette
Volume,
mL
Pressure
Rating,
psi
A2113HC3
50
1800
A2113HC4
150
1800
A2113HC
300
1800
A2113HC2
1000
1800
Solids Charging Systems
One of the modifications most frequently requested is a port
or other means to feed liquids, solids, or slurries into the vessel
without removing the head. This can be done in various ways.
Ball Valve Solids Charging Ports
ball valve with a 3/8"
diameter opening can
be installed on any one liter
or larger vessel and used
in conjunction with a high
pressure pipette for injecting
slurries under pressure. These
are opened or closed with a
quarter turn of the handle.
Larger diameter valves are
available for 1 gallon and
larger vessels. These ball
valves will withstand the full
A
pressure developed in a reactor at
moderate temperatures, but their
pressure rating falls off rapidly at
temperatures above 100 °C.
Solids Charging Ports
Part No.
Nominal
Size
Orifice
Diameter,
in.
A143VB
1/4" NPT (F)
0.250
A132VB
3/8" NPT (F)
0.375
396VBAD
1/2" NPT (F)
0.406
A143VB Ball Valve
External Catalyst Addition Devices
A
n external catalyst addition device in the head
of a reactor can serve as a
convenient solids charging port
at atmospheric pressures. The
body of this device is machined
with an internal taper to aide
in the delivery of the solids
into the vessel. It has a convenient screw cap closure. The
standard seal material is FKM
which will accommodate temperatures to 225 °C. Alternate
FFKM seals are available for
use to 300 °C. These devices
are offered in a variety of sizes
to compliment our reactor
volumes.
External Catalyst Addition
Devices
Reactor
Available Fitting Sizes
Mini
1/4" NPT (M)
1 & 2 Liter
3/8" NPT (M)
Gallon & up
1/2" NPT (M)
10 & 20 Liter
3/4” & 1” NPT (M)
Cross section of
A3663HC Catalyst
Addition Device
with internal taper
Internal Catalyst Addition Devices
arr has developed a unique
device for adding small
amounts of solids (or liquids)
from a sealed container held
within a reactor. It is of particular
interest to users performing
kinetic studies of catalytic reactions. This device consists of a
small cylindrical chamber with
a cap that is sealed to the body
with an O-ring. It attaches to the
underside of the vessel head
with a 1/8" NPT connection. To
discharge the contents of the
holder, gas pressure is applied
through a valve installed on
the top of the head. When the
applied pressure is greater than
P
the pressure within the reactor, the cap is forced open and
the catalyst or other contents
of the holder will be released
into the reactor. This device
works best in the taller, 450
mL and 600 mL Mini Reactors,
and in the 1 liter and larger
Parr Reactors.
A550
A550HC
Cata
Catalyst
Addi
Addition
Devi
Device
Internal Catalyst Addition Devices
ices
Complete
Reactor
Mounting
Size, cc
Assembly No.
Thread
Mini
6
A550HC3
1/8" NPT
One Liter
8
A550HC
1/8" NPT
Larger
20
A550HC2
1/8" NPT
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
120
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
Cooling Coils
nternal cooling coils are
available for all but the
smallest Parr reactors. These
coils provide an extremely
effective means of removing
heat from the vessel to control
an exothermic reaction or for
cooling the reactor at the end
of a test. Since heat is transferred through the relatively
thin wall of the coil instead of
the thick wall of the vessel,
cooling rates are generally
much faster than heating rates;
particularly at temperatures
above 80 °C. Water is normally
used as the cooling medium
although compressed air
can be used for modest
cooling loads. Cooling coils
are offered in three standard
configurations:
Single Loop - Single loop
coils consist of a vertical run of
tubing formed into a “hairpin”
shape. These are normally
installed on small reactors
where there is minimum space
available.
Serpentine Coils Serpentine coils consist of six
to eight vertical runs of tubing
uniformly spaced around the
circumference of the vessel.
I
Serpentine Cooling
Coil 1000 mL
Spiral Cooling
Coil 1000 mL
Glass Liners 2000 and 1000 mL Sizes
Temperature Limit: 565 ˚C
a
l
F
i
t
t
i
n
g
s
5
Liners
These coils provide reasonable
surface area, minimum interference with stirring patterns,
a reasonable amount of baffling, and ease of cleaning and
maintenance.
Spiral Coils - Spiral coils
consist of multiple loops
wound just inside the inside
diameter of the vessel. They
are normally available only
for the 4" and 6" ID vessels
although other sizes have been
built on special order. They
do maximize the cooling area
available, but sometimes at
the expense of uniform stirring
and ease of cleaning. The individual reactor specifications
will dictate the style of coil or
coils available for each reactor.
Cooling coils are available
in the same choice of materials
as the reactor bodies themselves. All cooling coils are
removable. Plugs are available
to close the openings in the
head and in most cases these
openings can be converted to
alternate inlets/outlets if cooling is not required.
PTFE Liners 2000 and 1000 mL Sizes
Temperature Limit: 225–250 ˚C
emovable, open top, cylindrical liners made either of
borosilicate glass or PTFE can
be furnished to fit most Parr
reactors and general purpose
vessels. These liners slide
into the cylinder and require
no additional fittings, but
they may not coordinate with
some alternate accessories
and stirrers. Although they
will not keep corrosive vapors
from reaching the surfaces of
the cylinder and head, they
make it much easier to add
and remove liquid reactants,
and they give some protection
to the cylinder when working
with corrosive solutions. It
must be noted, however, that
adding a PTFE liner will slow
the heat transfer rate into and
out of the vessel, and it may
be necessary to adjust the
temperature control method to
prevent overheating.
R
Liners
Fits
ID, in.
Fits
Cylinder
Size, mL
Glass
Liner
Part No.
PTFE
Liner
Part No.
1.3
50
1431HC
1431HCHA
1.3
100
1431HC2
1431HC2HA
1.5
125
2920HC2
2920HC4HA
1.5
200
2920HC3
2920HC3HA
1.5
75
2920HC
2920HC2HA
2-1/2
250
762HC10
NA
2-1/2
500
762HC2
762HCHHA
2-1/2
300
762HC
762HC4HA
2-1/2
450
762HC2
762HC5HA
2-1/2
600
762HC3
762HC6HA
2
100
762HC7
762HC7HA
2-1/2
160
762HC8
762HC8HA
3-1/4
600
2312HC
2312HC3HA
3-1/4
1200
2312HC2
2312HC4HA
3-3/4
1000
1441HC
1441HCHA
3-3/4
1800
1442HC
1442HCHA
4
1000
398HC
398HCHA
4
2000
399HC
399HCHA
6
1 Gallon
894HC
894HC4HA
6
2 Gallon
894HC2
894HC5HA
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
121
Sample Collection Vessels
sample collection vessel can be added to
most reactor systems. Designed to efficiently
and safely allow for the withdrawal of liquid or
vapor samples at elevated temperatures and
pressures, this quick close, O-ring seal vessel has
a volume of 5 mL or 10 mL and is designed for
operating pressures to 3000 psi (200 bar).
The typical arrangement for this sample vessel includes a cooling sleeve, isolation and vent
valves. A drain valve may also be added to
the vessel.
The isolation valve is mounted at the head of
this vessel and is used to seal the vessel once the
sample is transferred. The vent valve is installed
in a tee and is used to release any residual pressure in the line between the sample valve and the
sample vessel. Samples can be removed either
by opening the collection vessel and pouring it
out or by use of the drain valve.
A
Bottom Drain Valves
B
ottom drain valves can be added to most
Parr reactors. These valves are particularly
useful for those working with polymers or other
material that must be discharged from the
reactor while they are still hot and before they
can solidify. These valves are also quite useful
for the 1 gallon and larger vessels which are
too large to conveniently lift from the heater
for product recovery. Bottom valves are rarely
installed on the micro and mini reactors with
their small volumes and light vessel weights.
The standard bottom drain valve has a
rising stem, that is flush with the inside cylinder
bottom so that there is no dead space between
the bottom of the vessel and the shut off point
of the valve. In the fully open position the stem
is retracted completely to open a clear passage
A465VB Bottom
for draining the vessel.
Drain Valve
When the valve is reclosed, any material in
this passage will be pushed back into the reactor by the
rising stem.
Bottom Drain Valves
Valves with
Max. Max.
3/8" diameter
Part No. Opening Outlet
Press.,
Temp,
Seal
Dia., in.
Connection
psi
°C
clear passage
A485VB
0.20
1/4" NPT (F) 3000
225
PTFE
are recommended for
A485VB2 0.20
1/4" NPT (F) 3000
350
Silver
vessels with
A465VB
0.34
3/8" NPT (F) 2000
350
Grafoil
volumes
A465VB2* 0.34
3/8" NPT (F) 2000
350
Grafoil
from 1000
A465VB3 0.34
3/8" NPT (F) 2000
350
Silver
mL to 2
A177VB2 0.32
3/8" NPT (F) 5000
500
Silver
gallons. A
A296VB2 0.72
1" NPT (F)
1900
350
Silver
1/4" valve is
Standard material of construction is T316
Stainless Steel but it can be provided in any of
the other alloys if required. A high pressure 35
mL or 75 mL sample collection vessel without a
cooling sleeve for pressures to 5000 psi is available upon request.
Sample Collection Vessels
Part No.
Description
4351
Sample Collection vessel, 10 mL, with cooling
sleeve, isolation & vent valves for connection to
1/8”NPT valves
4352
Sample Collection vessel, 10 mL, with cooling
sleeve, isolation & vent valves for connection to
1/4”NPT valves
4353
Sample Collection vessel, 10 mL, with cooling
sleeve, isolation & vent valves for connection to
3/8”NPT valves
-D
Optional Drain Valve
available for 600 mL and smaller vessels. High
pressure and larger diameter valves are available where required.
These valves will withstand the full operating pressures and temperatures of the vessels in
which they are installed in the closed position.
They are available in all of the current Parr materials of construction. Users can also specify that a
reactor ordered with a bottom valve shall have a
tapered bottom so that it will drain easily through
the valve opening.
Not all Parr reactors will accept a bottom
drain valve. Since the valve extends approximately 8 inches below the bottom of the vessel,
the entire vessel must be raised by this amount
to accommodate the valve. This makes some
models too tall for convenient bench top operation. The specification tables for each model will
identify those reactors in which a bottom drain
can be readily installed, and those which will
not accept a bottom drain, or those which will
require custom modification of the heater and
support stand to accommodate a bottom valve.
Needle Valves and Ball Valves
eedle valves and ball valves can also be
installed as bottom outlet valves. Needle
valves are generally used on the smaller reactors.
While ball valves can be used for large discharge
passages, they are generally limited in their
operating temperature/pressure capabilities and
they leave a fairly large dead space between the
bottom of the vessel and the seat of the valve.
N
* Set up for a Band Heater.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
122
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
123
i
n
g
Valves and Fittings
arr stocks and can install
a wide variety of valves
and fittings for use with reactors and pressure vessels.
These include:
• Needle Valves with NPT or
tube connection.
P
Manual Control Valves for
Compressed Gas Tanks
ank valves with couplings
to fit standard compressed
gas cylinders are available in
stainless steel for corrosive
gases and in nickel plated
brass for non-corrosive gases.
The brass valves have a 2-1/2"
diameter pressure gage which
shows the tank pressure. Both
styles have a 1/4" NPT female
outlet which will accept any
pressure hose or gas tube
assembly. These valves do not
regulate the delivery pressure
of the gas. Pressure regulators
are available on special order.
T
• Regulating Valves with NPT
or tube connection.
• Ball Valves with NPT or
tube connection.
• High Pressure Valves
• Severe Service Valves
• Remote Operating Valves
•
•
•
•
Tube Connectors
Pipe Connectors
Plugs
Union Coupling Adapters
Please contact our customer
service department for details.
T303 Stainless Steel Valves-No Gage
Fits CGA Tank
Valve No.
Outlet No.
Typical Usage
A120VBPN
510
Propane, butane, ethylene oxide
A120VBPP
660
Chlorine, sulfur dioxide, nitric oxide
Nickel-Plated Brass Valves with Cylinder Pressure Gage
Fits CGA Tank
Valve No.
Outlet No.
Typical Usage
A120VBPQ
320
Carbon dioxide, methyl bromide
A120VBPR
350
Hydrogen, carbon monoxide, ethylene
A120VBPS
540
Oxygen
A120VBPT
580
Nitrogen, argon, helium
A120VBPU
590
Air
Note: Can be furnished with DIN/BSP connections on special order
Safety Check Valves
henever gases or liquids
are introduced into a vessel under pressure, the supply
pressure must be greater than
the pressure in the vessel to
prevent reverse flow back into
the supply system. Protection
against reverse flow can be
obtained by installing a check
valve in the supply line. With
a check valve in the line, the
valve will snap shut if the
supply pressure is lower than
the pressure in the vessel.
W
This protection is particularly
important on stirred reactors
where gas enters through a
dip tube. With liquids in the
vessel, any back pressure will
force liquid back into the gas
tank or into the gas supply
system.
Parr stocks the poppet
check valves for incorporation
into the user’s supply lines.
These valves are typically
constructed of T316SS with
FKM O-rings with a 10 psi
cracking pressure. Alternate
O-ring materials and cracking
pressures are available upon
request.
363VB Check Valve
364VB Check Valve
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Thermocouples
arr offers a variety of thermocouples for use
in our reactors and pressure vessels. The
standard thermocouple is a Type J (iron-constantan) which is compatible with the operating
temperature range of these vessels.
The thermocouples are furnished with a
sealed 1/8”OD stainless steel sheath and include
a standard plug connection at the end of the
probe. Our standard thermocouples are manufactured in accordance to ASTM E230.
Alternate thermocouple materials including Alloys C276 and 600 are readily available.
Platinum resistance elements (3-wire RTD) are
available as special orders as well as multiple
point thermocouples.
Most commonly, in small volume vessels the
thermocouple probe is installed directly into the
vessel with a compression fitting and in larger
vessels the probe sits inside a thermowell. The
thermowell arrangement offers protection to the
thermocouple from physical damage. We also
furnish thermowells in vessels manufactured in
materials other than stainless steel so the ther-
P
mowell will be the alternate alloy and the thermocouple probe
can be stainless steel.
Additionally, dual element thermocouples with two separate
thermocouples in a single sheath are furnished in smaller volume
vessels for use with accessory temperature meters. We also offer
spring loaded thermocouples which are designed to be installed
through the heater wall to the outside wall of the pressure vessel.
An extension wire is
Type J Thermocouples with 1/8" Diameter
furnished to
Part Number
Stem Length, in.
Sheath Material
connect the
thermocouple
A472E
7.5
T316 Stainless Steel
to the control
A472E2
9.5
T316 Stainless Steel
device. The
A472E3
11.5
T316 Stainless Steel
standard
length is 5
A472E6
15.5
T316 Stainless Steel
feet but longer
A472E5
21.5
T316 Stainless Steel
lengths are
A472E4
5.5
T316 Stainless Steel
available if the
A472E8
2.5
T316 Stainless Steel
control is to
be mounted
Most of the above listed thermocouples are also available as
away from the
Type K (Chromel-Alumel) or Type T (Copper-Constantan).
reactor.
Pressure Hose
T
hree different pressure hose assembles are
available for high pressure gas connections
A506HC
to both stirred and non-stirred vessels. The
A490HC
A495HC Pressure Hose
Pressure Tube
Pressure Hose
standard hose is a 6 foot length with a male “A”
socket connector on one side and a 1/8" NPT (M)
and recommended for use with corrosive gases and liquids, and
nipple with a 1/4" NPT (M) bushing on the other
for applications requiring additional abrasion resistance, but it is
end. The “A” socket side of the hose attaches to
not intended for high temperature liquids or gases.
couplings installed on the inlet valve of all stirred
The A506HC Tube Assembly is a 6-foot length of 1/8" OD stainreactors and non-stirred vessels, as well as to a
less steel tubing, rated for 7500 psi. This small diameter tubing is
side port of the gage block assembly. The choice
“bendable”, but it is not as flexible as the other hoses. It is recomof either 1/8" NPT or 1/4" NPT on the opposite
mended for corrosive gases, high temperature transfers and other
end of the hose allows for attachment to most
high pressure applications. Special versions of this assembly can
gas tank valves, pressure regulators or other gas
be made of other corrosion resistant materials. Larger tubing can
supply sources.
be used, but it is rigid rather than flexible.
The A495HC Hose Assembly is made of nylon.
Special hoses with different lengths or end fittings can be
It is rated for 2500 psi and is very flexible and
assembled for special orders.
easy to use with dry, non-corrosive gases (nitrogen, hydrogen and oxygen).
Care must be taken to ensure
Pressure Hose
that the nylon hose does not
A495HC
Pressure Hose Assembly, 6-ft, reinforced Nylon
come in direct contact with any
A495HC5
Pressure
Hose Assembly, 6-ft, reinforced Nylon, with check valve
hot surfaces on the vessel or
heater. One of these hoses is
A495HC7
Pressure Hose Assembly, 10-ft, reinforced Nylon
included with each complete
A495HC8
Pressure Hose Assembly, 10-ft, reinforced Nylon, with check valve
Parr Series 4500, 5100, and
A490HC
Pressure Hose Assembly, 6-ft, PTFE-lined, braided stainless steel
5500 Stirred Pressure Reaction
Apparatus.
A490HC5
Pressure Hose Assembly, 6-ft, PTFE-lined, braided stainless steel, with check valve
The A490HC Hose Assembly
A506HC
Pressure Tube Assembly, 6-ft, 1/8-in OD, T316SS
is a braided, stainless steel hose
A506HC2
Pressure Tube Assembly, 6-ft, 1/8-in OD, T316SS, with check valve
with a PTFE lining, rated for
2500 psi. It is reasonably flexible
Alternate lengths available upon request.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
124
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
125
i
n
g
Equipment for Use in Potentially Ignitable Atmospheres
arr reactors are typically
equipped with totally
enclosed variable speed
motors, electric heaters, and
controllers intended for use in
non-hazardous environments.
These standard units can be
used in most laboratories
without undue hazard, but
there will be situations where
the installed equipment must
be considered for use in ignitable atmospheres. Parr offers
various optional stirrer drives
and heating solutions to meet
these strict requirements.
P
USA and Canadian Codes
(HAZLOC – Hazardous
Locations)
Designing electrical
equipment to be operated
in hazardous locations is a
complex subject, which is governed by extensive national
electrical codes and supplemented by local regulations.
These codes require all electrical equipment that is installed
in a governed location must be
approved for use with the specific gas, vapor, or dust that
can be present in the defined
location. USA and Canadian
electrical codes classify hazardous locations according to
the nature and concentration
of specific hazardous or flammable materials. These are
divided into three classes:
Class I – Flammable liquids, gases or vapors.
Class II – Combustible
or electrically conductive
dusts.
Class III – Easily ignitable
fibers/flyings.
There are two divisions
within each of these classes.
Division 1 – Where the
flammable material exists in
the atmosphere under normal
operating conditions.
Division 2 – Where the
hazardous material is confined
within a closed system from
which it may be released only
under abnormal conditions,
such as a gas leak in the
system.
Class I locations are further
subdivided into four groups,
A, B, C and D which identify
specific explosive gases and
vapors. Explosive dusts and
fibers in Class II are subdivided
into Groups E, F and G. Most
hazardous applications for Parr
apparatus will occur in atmospheres identified by Class
I, Group B for hydrogen and
Groups C and D for most other
combustible gases and vapors.
Class II, Group F covers coal
dust. Most other combustible
dusts, such as flour and grain,
are in Group G. Minimum ignition temperatures and energy
levels are established for specific materials in each group.
The European Community
has corresponding classifications for “Explosive
Atmospheres” referred to as
ATEX (ATmospheriques
EXplosives). Parr will work
with all users to provide equipment compatible with their
own local codes.
The components in Parr
reactor systems that may be
considered hazardous and
the steps that can be taken
to reduce or eliminate the
hazards they represent are
described below.
Motors
Because of sparking from
brush contacts, permanent
magnet DC electric motors
clearly represent the principal
ignition source introduced
by a stirred reactor. Electric
motors approved for Class I
(Divisions 1 & 2), Groups C
and D, and Class II (Divisions
1 & 2), Groups F and G atmospheres are readily available
in most sizes and voltages.
These totally enclosed motors
are suitable for many hazardous applications, and they
are sometimes used with
hydrogen, though they are not
Model 4524 Reactor, 2000 mL, Fixed Head Style with
Aluminum Block Heater
approved for Group B atmospheres. Currently, there are
no Division 1 motors available
for Group A or B atmospheres.
A special air purging system
can be used to reduce the
classification inside the motor.
The motor is pressurized by
building up a positive pressure
of air, or inert gas, within the
motor to prevent explosive
gases or vapors from entering
the motor housing.
Division 2 requirements are
not as stringent. Other motor
options are available. Please
contact Parr for additional
information for Class I, Division
2 requirements.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Equipment for Use in Potentially Ignitable Atmospheres, Continued
Air Motor
Parr can provide ATEX
rated, IEC framed, AC motors
when required. These constant
torque motors have lower
speed and torque characteristics than the DC motors Parr
has used in the last several
years.
An alternate method of
dealing with the explosion
hazard is to use an air driven
motor. These are powered
by compressed air and offer
a convenient and satisfactory
drive system for use in flammable atmospheres, including
hydrogen. They are available
in sizes suitable for most Parr
reactors.
Heaters
The advisable way to heat
a Parr reactor in a potentially
ignitable atmosphere is to use
a hot oil jacket and ensure that
the highest temperature of the
heat transfer media is below
the minimum ignition temperature for the classified area in
which it will be installed.
Purging Parr’s aluminum
block heaters with air, as well
as limiting surfaces temperatures below the autoignition
temperature, can make them
suitable for use in classified
areas, but it is likely that the air
consumption in such heaters
will be quite large. Please see
our Heaters page for additional
information.
Wiring
Parr will provide ordinary
location wiring for motors
and heaters, which can be
used for initial testing, setup,
etc. Due to national and local
requirements for installation of
such equipment, it is the user’s
responsibility to install mains
and motor wiring per code
requirements.
Parr will provide wiring for
intrinsic safety related sensors,
transducers, etc. For application specific information on
sensors for use in hazardous
locations, please contact Parr
Instrument Company.
Controllers
The most commonly used
method for dealing with the
ignition hazard introduced
by a temperature or process
controller is simply to locate
the controller outside of
the hazardous atmosphere.
Another choice is to install the
controller in an explosionproof
cabinet or a cabinet that can
be purged using the purging
system described above.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
126
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
i
n
g
s
7
Windows
indows can be installed in Parr
stirred reactors and pressure
vessels for visual observations, light
transmission and other purposes.
They usually are installed in pairs so
that light can be introduced through
one window while the other is used
for viewing. Our standard material
for these windows is fused silica.
Sapphire is also available for small
diameter windows. Alternative
window materials (with coatings,
if requested) are available for
specific transmission requirements.
Windows can be mounted in several
different ways.
W
Screw-in Circular Windows
The simplest window is a screw-in
type with a ½ inch diameter viewing area. The windows in these
assemblies are sealed in a fitting
which screws into the vessel using
a standard ½ inch NPT male pipe
thread. Obviously, the vessel wall
must be thick enough to provide full
engagement for this thread. O-ring
seals restrict the maximum operating temperature to 225 °C or less,
depending upon the O-ring material.
Alternatively, a Grafoil® gasket seal
option is available to increase temperature rating up to 350 °C. Pressure
ratings range from 1900 to 5000
psi, depending upon the window
material and its thickness. Although
these windows are rather small for
straight optical viewing, they work
well for small video systems and for
laser and other analytical beams. A
limitation of this design is that there
is a dead space approximately 1.25
inches long between the inner face
of the window and the inside wall of
the vessel.
Integral Windows
Parr has developed designs for
installing windows in the wall of the
vessel so that the inside face of the
window is very close to the inside
wall of the vessel. This eliminates
the large dead space associated
with screw-in windows. These
windows are offered in the two styles
described below. The maximum size
of the window will depend on the
size of the cylinder in which it will be
installed.
Round Windows with a 1/2” diameter viewing area are the standard.
Round windows are available in a
variety of materials including sapphire for very high pressures (up to
5000 psi). Both O-ring and Grafoil®
seals are available in this design. This
type of window is generally used for
visual, photographic or optical sensor
observations.
Oblong Windows with a viewing
area 3.50” long and 0.62” wide are
the standard size and can be installed
on vessels of 100 mL micro or 450
mL mini and larger. Only O-ring seals
are available in this design. Both
Fused Silica and sapphire windows
are available – maximum rating for
these windows are limited to 1900
psi @ 225 °C with FKM or FFKM
seals. These windows are commonly
used for visual observations of both
the vapor and liquid phases or for
observing the liquid level in the vessel. Multiple windows can be stacked
or staggered on larger vessels.
The windows described above
as standard are maintained in our
inventory for readily available
replacements. Custom windows in
both the round and oblong styles
can be furnished in larger sizes upon
request. All reactors and pressure
vessels equipped with windows
require custom designed heaters
and supports. Flexible heating
mantles, integral cartridge heaters,
and attached circulating jackets (600
mL mini and larger) are the most
commonly used heaters for window
vessels.
Externally Welded Windows
Large round windows that are
externally welded to the vessel can be
installed. These will provide a viewing
area of 1¾” to 7¼” depending on the
size of the window ordered and the
size of the vessel. Externally welded
windows greatly reduce the maximum working pressure of the vessel
to 600 psi or less.
Certification
The windows described above are
considered “proprietary fittings” and
as such are excluded from the scope
of ASME Section VIII Division 1.
Most of the standard windows
furnished by Parr can be installed
on vessels bearing the CE mark. The
windows furnished on these vessels
are subjected to various tests on
a per lot basis in order to satisfy
requirements of 97/23/EC (Pressure
Equipment Directive). Please contact
Parr Instrument Company for further
information.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Com pany
127
Insulated Electrical Glands
variety of insulated electrical leads can be installed
in most Parr reactors or
pressure vessels for electrical
connections required inside
the vessel. Four commonly
used examples are discussed
below.
A
Transducer Glands
Transducer glands are
available to allow up to 16
individual wires to be sealed
and insulated through a single
gland. These types of glands
are typically used with low
voltages and current.
Electrode Glands
Applications requiring a
single electrical conductor
having high current or very
high voltage capacities can
be handled with an electrode
gland. These glands provide
a seal for a single conductor
or electrode with the ends of
the conductor threaded so
that internal and external lead
wires can easily be attached.
Power Leads
Power leads can be provided with either single or
Spare Parts Kits
E
ach stirred reactor is furnished with a set of spare
parts and fittings including a
6-foot gas supply hose, head
gaskets, rupture discs, and a
set of replacement parts for
the stirrer drive.
A reserve supply kit of
spare parts can be ordered
from Parr Technical Service
to provide sufficient parts and
tools to handle most normal
replacements and emergency
repairs during the first year
of heavy usage. These kits
Temperature Limits
multiple flexible wires. Current
ratings range from 5 to 20
amperes at up to 600 volts.
PTFE or ceramic insulating
glands are commonly available. Ceramic glands can be
used to the full temperature
rating of most Parr vessels.
Pressure ratings will vary
depending upon the design of
the gland, its size, and the type
of insulation used.
Miscellaneous Sensors
Parr has installed a number
of different sensors in its
various reactors and pressure
vessels, including single point
and continuous liquid level
sensors, pH electrodes, and
dissolved oxygen electrodes.
Each of these installations
must be carefully developed
in consultation with the user,
the electrode or probe supplier, and Parr’s Engineering
Department. Glass electrodes
with O-ring seals will obviously
carry rather strict temperature
and pressure restrictions. There
are also space restrictions
which generally dictate that
accessories of this type can
only be installed in 1000 mL or
larger vessels.
include replacement gaskets,
O-rings, rupture discs, drive
belts, and seals. These kits are
a convenient package of the
small perishable items required
for normal maintenance of the
reactor.
When ordering any kit for an
existing reactor please provide
the serial number, specify the
preferred gasket/seal material, the burst pressure of the
rupture disc, material of the
reactor, and the length of the
drive belt.
here are a number of factors that determine the
maximum temperature rating
of a pressure vessel. For most
applications it is the gasket
material. Vessels with O-ring
seals are limited to 225 °C and
those with FKM or FFKM are
limited to 300 °C. Parr’s design
for contained PTFE gaskets
extends the operating
temperature range to 350
°C. Flexible Graphite (FG)
material essentially removes
the gasket as the limiting
factor. Maximum temperature
limits for the metals used in
these vessels are established
by ASME code and other
standards. Most metals have
maximum temperature limits
between 400 and 800 °C. The
allowable strength for these
metals falls off rapidly as they
reach maximum operating
temperature. Finally, the
difficulties encountered with
screw threads and other closure components operating at
high temperatures establish a
practical temperature limit for
externally heated vessels. We
have found 600 °C to be
a reasonable limit.
T
Internally Heated Vessels
Exposed Heaters. Another
approach that has proven
useful in extending the maximum temperature limit is to
place the heater inside the
pressure vessel. The heater
is surrounded by a layer of
insulation. This creates a hot
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
128
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
O
p
t
i
o
n
a
l
F
i
t
t
s
7
Com pany
129
i
n
g
External Valves and Fittings
zone in the center of the vessel
and prevents the walls from
exceeding their allowable
limit. As this system is very
energy efficient, internal heaters can be less powerful than
external heaters. Internally
heated vessels are equipped
with insulated electrical feedthroughs to power the heater.
Multiple thermocouples are
used to control or monitor the
temperatures in the hot zone
and on the vessel inner wall.
The reactions or studies
carried out in internally heated
vessels must be limited to
those which will not destroy
the exposed internal heaters
and insulation. These are
normally gas-solid reactions
or controlled atmosphere
heat treatment studies. The
heating elements are normally
ceramic. Some users have
developed induction style
heaters and insulators and
have extended their investigations to above 2500 °C.
Although internal heaters
can be installed in almost
any non-stirred Parr pressure
vessel, vessels with larger
I.D.s are required in most
applications.
Protected Heaters.
Internally heated vessels
have also been manufactured
with cartridge type heating
elements inserted in specially
designed “heater wells”.
These wells protect the heater
from the reactants and expand
the applications that can be
studied. Cartridge type heaters
have a maximum temperature
of 760 °C.
Materials of Construction
n the standard configuration,
the valves, gage, magnetic
drive, and other external parts
on Parr reactors are furnished
in stainless steel, even when a
different material is specified
for the head, cylinder, and
internal wetted parts. The
external stainless components
are typically only exposed to
the vapor of the reactants and
are at much lower temperature
than the cylinder and internal
fittings. These conditions allow
stainless steel external fittings
to perform satisfactorily in
most cases. If external parts
made of a material other than
stainless steel are required for
safety or other reasons, Parr
can accommodate this in most
cases. Any request for external
parts made of a specific material must be stated clearly
when ordering.
I
Valves
Most reactor valves are
also available in Alloy 400 at
a reasonable cost premium.
Valves made of Alloy C-276 are
also available, but generally
only on special designs and at
a considerable cost premium.
Soft materials such as titanium
and zirconium generally make
poor performing valves.
Gages
Pressure gages are available in stainless steel and
Alloy 400. Other materials of
construction are not available. The standard method
for protecting the gage in a
corrosive environment is to
install a diaphragm gage protector. These have a flexible
diaphragm which isolates the
gage from the reactants and
a sealed hydraulic connection
for pressure transfer to the
gage. These assemblies are
too large to install on all but
the largest Parr reactors. The
diaphragm assemblies are
large and may not be practical
on small reactors.
As an alternative, Parr has
designed an oil filled piston
isolator gage protector to isolate the gage (and transducer,
if required) on reactors and
pressure vessels where space
is limited. These isolators
can be furnished in any of
the current Parr materials of
construction. A piston style
isolator can limit the precision the pressure measuring
device.
Pressure Transducers
Pressure transducers are
commonly available in stainless steel and Alloy C-276
though other materials may
be available. Parr provides a
mounting adapter with a water
cooling jacket on pressure
transducers to protect them
from excessive temperatures.
These can be augmented
with isolators similar to gage
protectors when corrosion
resistance is required. When
a gage and a pressure transducer are installed, a single
isolator can protect both.
Magnetic Drives
Magnetic drives can be
furnished in all of the current
Parr materials of construction except nickel, which is
magnetic.
Rupture Discs
The standard materials of
construction for rupture discs
is Alloy 600, gold-faced Alloy
600, and Alloy C-276. Tantalum
and other premium materials
are available on special order.
Please see the Safety
Rupture Disc Assemblies
manual 231M for available
rupture discs.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Notes
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
130
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
Series xxxx Pressure Vessels
Chapter 8
Non-Stirred
Pressure
Vessels
Inside this chapter you will find:
4703-4714 22-45 ML
4740-4742 25-75 ML HIGH PRESSURE
4750-4755 125-200 ML
4791-4793 25-100 ML
4791HP/HT-4793HP/HT 25-100 ML HIGH
PRESSURE / HIGH TEMPERATURE
4760-4777 100-600 ML
4760HT-4768HT 300-600 ML
HIGH TEMPERATURE
4601-4622 1000-2000 ML
4605-4626 600-1200 ML
HIGH PRESSURE
4651-4653 250-1000 ML
HIGH PRESSURE
4661-4664 1 & 2 GALLON
4681-4684 1000-1800 ML HIGH
PRESSURE / HIGH TEMPERATURE
4671-4674 1 & 1.5 GALLON HIGH
PRESSURE / HIGH TEMPERATURE
4676-4679 2.6 & 5 GALLON
GAGE BLOCK ASSEMBLIES
CONED PRESSURE FITTINGS
131
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
Non-Stirred Pressure Vessels
P
arr offers a broad selection of non-stirred
pressure vessels in convenient styles, sizes
and pressure ranges for many laboratory uses.
Recent additions to this line have included new
sizes, new temperature and pressure combina-
tions and new self-sealing closures, all designed
to provide convenient vessels for laboratory procedures that must be performed under pressure at
elevated temperatures.
Pressure Vessel Selection Procedure
The steps to be followed in selecting a nonstirred pressure vessel are similar to those used
for a stirred reactor. Selection begins with the
Guide to Non-Stirred Vessels, from which the
user can identify the Model Number for vessels
in a range of sizes with temperature and pressure ratings suitable for the intended application.
Detailed specifications and catalog numbers can
then be found on the referenced page. After the
specifications have been established, the options
and accessories required to customize a complete
pressure vessel system can be selected.
Guide to Parr Non-Stirred Vessels
Model Number
Vessel Style
Vessel Size
Max. Press. psi (bar)
Max. Temp. °C
See Page
Number
4703-4714
Screw Cap
22-45 mL
1700 (115)
300
134
4740-4742
High Pressure
25-75 mL
8500 (575)
350
136
4791-4793
Split Ring
25-100 mL
3000 (200)
350
140
4791HP/HT-4793HP/HT
Split Ring
25-100 mL
5000 (200)
500
140
4750-4755
Split Ring
125-200 mL
3000 (200)
350
138
4760-4777
Split Ring
100-600 mL
3000 (200)
350
144
4760HT-4768HT
Split Ring
300-600 mL
2000 (200)
500
144
4651-4653
High Pressure
250-1000 mL
6000 (345)
600
154
4605-4626
High Pressure
600-1200 mL
5000 (345)
350
152
4601-4622
Split Ring
1000-2000 mL
1900 (130)
350
148
4601HP-4622HP
Split Ring
970-1900 mL
2900 (200)
350
148
4661-4666
Split Ring
1 & 2 gallon
1900 (130)
350
156
4680-4683
High Pressure
1000-1800 mL
6000 (345)
600
158
4671-4674
High Pressure
1 & 1.5 gallon
3000 (200)
600
160
4676-4679*
Split Ring
2.6 & 5 gallon
1900 (130)
350
162
*May be modified for pressures to 5000 psi & temps to 500°C.
Head Design
Many of the non-stirred vessels offer a basic head with a 1/8" NPT plug. These
should be considered as only a starting point for custom built vessels as they do
not include a safety relief device. Safety codes, good practice, and common sense
dictate that a safety relief device should be installed on all vessels. The 1/8" NPT
plug is provided for the user to install their own safety relief device.
Users who take delivery of vessels without safety relief
devices installed must take responsibility for installing adequate
protective devices before the vessel is placed in service.
Model 4703, 22 mL, with Rupture Disc.
132
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Parr General Purpose Vessels with Volumes from 22 to 2000 mL.
Index to Non-Stirred Vessel Design
Features, Options and Accessories
Available Accessories Include Heaters, Controllers,
Valves, Gage Block Assemblies, and Gas Filling Hoses
Primary Accessories
Reference Page
Heaters
108
Temperature Controllers
99
Gage Block Assemblies
165
Valves and Fittings
123
Options
Reference Page
Gaskets and Seals
18
Materials of Construction
10
Pressure Gages
117
Rupture Disc
116
Certification
9
Accessories*
Reference Page
Liners
121
Pressure Hoses
124
Check Valves
123
Liquid Pipettes
120
Gas Filling Systems
118
* May require modifications of vessel to install
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
133
Series 4703-4714 General Purpose Pressure Vessels: 22 & 45 mL
Series Number:
4700
Type:
General Purpose
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable
Sizes, mL:
22, 45
Maximum Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1700 (115)
Maximum Temperature
300 °C
hese are the smallest of the
Parr General Purpose Pressure
Vessels. They have a 1 inch inside
diameter and are offered in two
different lengths with volumes of 22
and 45 mL.
These vessels have a flat PTFE or
flexible graphite gasket that is sealed
with a screw cap. Special wrenches
and bench sockets are offered for
tightening these closures. The screw
caps and bodies are made of alloy
steel for use at temperatures to 300
°C. The maximum working pressure
4714 Cross Section
is 1700 psi (115 bar). The standard
material of construction for these
small, inexpensive vessels is Type
316 Stainless Steel, but they are also available in all of the current materials of construction Parr provides.
There is room for a single opening on the head of these vessels. This is generally an “A” socket which will accept a 4316
Gage Block Assembly.
These heads can also be furnished with 1/8" NPT, 1/4" NPT, or
a rupture disc assembly.
These vessels are normally heated in ovens, baths, or similar
general purpose heating devices. Special heaters for these vessels are not available from Parr.
T
Model 4704, 22 mL Vessel shown with
Needle Valve.
Series 4701-4714 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4703
Sizes, mL
4704
4713
22
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
4714
45
1700 psi (115 bar)
Maximum Temperature
300 °C
Closure
Screw Cap-Steel
Gasket
Flat - PTFE
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1.0
Inside Depth, inches
1.6
3.8
1
2
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
Head Style
Opening*
1/8" NPT w/plug
“A” Socket
Thermowell
1/8" NPT w/plug
“A” Socket
Not Available
Heater
Not Available
Maximum Head Openings
Recommended Gage Block
Recommended Wrench
Recommended Bench Socket
1
NA
4316
NA
4316
21AC4
A22AC3
*Note: Alternative heads are available with 1/8" or 1/4" NPT, or Rupture Disc Assembly. See Selection Guide.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
134
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4703-4714 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is:
47___ - SS - 21AC4 - A22AC3
A composite identification number to be used when ordering
a 4700 Series Reactor can be developed by combining individual
symbols from the separate sections below. For more information
on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4703
22 mL
4704
22 mL
4713
45 mL
4714
45 mL
Head Style*
One opening, w/ plug, steel closure (See D)
“A” Socket, steel closure
One opening, w/ plug, steel closure (See D)
“A” Socket, steel closure
B Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
C Required Accessories
Part No.
Description
-21AC4
Wrench
-A22AC3
Bench Socket
D *Alternative Heads
-7AC27
1/8" NPT w/plug
-7AC8
1/4" NPT w/plug
-7AC12
Rupture Disc Assembly (specify 1700 or 2000 psi disc)
E Certifications
-No Symbol
No Certification
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Model 4714, 45 mL Vessel, with 4316 Gage Block Assembly.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
135
Series 4740 HP/HT Pressure Vessels: 25 & 75 mL
Series Number:
4740
Type:
High Pressure /
High Temperature
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable
Sizes, mL:
25, 75
Maximum Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
8500 (585)
hese are the smallest of Parr High Pressure,
High Temperature vessels. They have a 1 inch
inside diameter and offer volumes of 25 or 75
mL. These vessels are closed with an alloy steel
screw cap which includes six compression bolts to
develop the sealing force on a flat, flexible graphite
gasket. Interchangeable PTFE gaskets are also
available for users who need the high pressure
capabilities provided by these vessels, but who do
not need to operate above 350 °C. Maximum pressure drops quickly at temperatures above 350 °C to
a rating of 1850 psi (125 bar) at 538 °C. An alternate
screw cap of Alloy C-276 is available to allow for
operating conditions of 8500 psi at 500 °C. These
vessels are available in all of the standard materials 4740 Cross Section
currently offered by Parr, although some of these
materials will limit the maximum pressures and temperatures available.
The head of these vessels can only accommodate one opening. It is
designed to accept the 4316 Gage Block Assembly which can be furnished with or without a thermocouple. Parr now offers the 4921 Bench
Top Ceramic Fiber heater for use with the 75 mL, 4740 vessel only. The
smaller 4742 Vessels are generally heated in an oven, bath, furnace or
similar general purpose heater (not available from Parr).
T
Model 4740, 75 mL Vessel,
with Gage Block Assembly.
Series 4740 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Maximum Temperature
538 °C
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4740
Approximate Sizes, mL
4742
75
25
Maximum Pressure (MAWP) @ 350 °C
8500 psi (585 bar)
Maximum Temperature
538 °C
Max. Pressure at Max. Temp., psi (bar)
1850 (125)
Max. Pressure & Temp. w/Alloy C-276 Screw Cap
8500 @ 500 °C
Closure
Screw Cap (6 Compression Bolts)
Gasket
Flat - Flexible Graphite
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
Inside Depth, inches
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
1.0
5.6
1.7
5
4
Head Style
Opening*
“A” Socket
Thermowell
N/A
Mounting
Moveable
Maximum Head Openings
1
Recommended Gage Block
4316 or 4316-TC
Heater
Heater Style
Heater Power, Watts
Ceramic Fiber
N/A
700
N/A
*Alternate Head w/Rupture Disc Assembly only is available.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
136
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4740 Ordering Guide
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4740 Series Vessel
System can be developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections
below. For more information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4740
75 mL
4742
25 mL
Head Style
One “A” Socket
One “A” Socket
Please note that the head of this vessel can only accommodate one opening.
B Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO**
Alloy 400
-IN
Nickel 200
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy C-276
-T12
Titanium Grade 2
-T14
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
** MAWP/T Varies for these Alloys
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
C Available Options
-HCSC
Alloy C-276 Screw Cap
D Heaters
Part No.
4921EB
4921EE
Description
Ceramic Fiber Heater w/ Stand
Ceramic Fiber Heater w/ Stand
Model 4740, 75 mL Vessel, with
Model 4921 Ceramic Fiber Heater.
Volume
75 mL
75 mL
Wattage
700
700
Voltage
115
230
E Certifications
-No Symbol
No Certification
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
137
Series 4750 General Purpose Pressure Vessels: 125 & 200 mL
Series Number:
eneral Purpose 4750 Series Vessels are available in volumes of 125 and 200 mL, rated
for temperatures up to 350 °C and a maximum
pressure of 3000 psi (200 bar). They come standard
with a Split Ring closure with 6 compression bolts,
and a choice of three different head styles: 1/8"
NPT w/plug, an “A” Socket, or an “A” Socket with
Thermocouple. The maximum amount of openings
for this head style is two and would be dependent
on the size of the ports and the type of fitings
required.
For the 4750 Series General Purpose Vessels,
Parr offers the 4921 Ceramic Fiber Heater.
G
4750
Type:
General Purpose
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable
Cross Section 4750
Sizes, mL:
125, 200
Maximum Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
Model 4753, 200 mL Vessel, with
4316 Gage Block Assembly.
Maximum Temperature
350 °C
Series 4750 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4750
Approximate Sizes, mL
4751
4754
4752
4753
125
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
4755
200
3000 psi (200 bar)
Maximum Temperature
350 °C
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts)
Gasket
Flat - PTFE
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1.5
Inside Depth, inches
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
4.5
7.0
4
5
Head Style
Opening
Thermocouple
Mounting
1/8" NPT
w/plug
“A” Socket
“A” Socket
& 1/8” NPT
1/8" NPT
w/plug
“A” Socket
“A” Socket
& 1/8” NPT
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
Moveable
Maximum Head Openings
Recommended Gage Block
2
4316
Heater
Heater Style
Ceramic Fiber
Heater Power, Watts
700
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
138
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4750 Ordering Guide
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4750
Series Vessel System can be developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information on how to
use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4750
125 mL
4751
125 mL
4754
125 mL
Head Style
One Opening, 1/8” NPT with plug
One “A” Socket
“A” Socket and Thermocouple
4752
4753
4755
One Opening with plug
One “A” Socket
“A” Socket and Thermocouple
200 mL
200 mL
200 mL
B Materials of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
C Alternate Heads
-428HC14
1/8" NPT w/Plug
-428HC6
1/4” NPT w/Plug
-428HC17
Rupture Disc Assembly
-428HC3
“A” Socket
D Gage Block
Part No.
-4316-1000
-4316-2000
-4316-3000
-100, -200, or -600
-TC
Assemblies for “A” Socket
Gage Diameter
Range
3.5 in.
0-1000 psi
3.5 in.
0-2000 psi
3.5 in.
0-3000 psi
0-100, 200, or 600 psi with relief valve available for above
Thermocouple in Gage Block
E Heater
Part No.
-4921EB
-4921EE
Description
Ceramic Fiber w/ Stand
Ceramic Fiber w/ Stand
Wattage
700
700
Model 4751, 125 mL Vessel, with 4316 Gage Block
Assembly.
Voltage
115
230
F Certifications
-No Symbol
No Certification
-ASME
ASME Certification
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
Parr Certification
Available stand assembly with heater
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
139
Series 4790 Pressure Vessel Systems: 25-100 mL
Series Number:
4790
Type:
Micro
Stand:
Bench Top
4791 Cross Section
(Showing Flat Gasket and
O-ring Closure)
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Sizes, mL:
25, 50, 100
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
5000 (345)
4793 100 mL Micro Pressure Vessel with PTFE Flat Gasket.
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Temperature (HT) /
High Pressure (HP)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
500 w/ FG Flat Gasket
(Fixed Head Only)
T
hese small pressure vessels are a good
choice for chemists working with very
expensive materials or materials only available
in small amounts. They will also appeal to users
who wish to minimize the risks associated with
hazardous materials or reactions by restricting
the reactants or products to a minimum. Use of
the Series 4790 vessels also helps minimize the
quantities of waste products which may require
special disposal procedures. The 4790 vessels are
now available in high pressure (5000 psi) or high
pressure/high temperature (500 °C) versions.
These micro vessels have been designed to
provide as many of the features of the larger
vessels as possible in the limited space available. The standard head fittings include a gage,
rupture disc, thermocouple, and valves. Optional
cooling now available with aluminum block
heaters with cooling capability, welded jackets,
or cold fingers.
The vessels are offered in both fixed head and
moveable head vessel styles with choices
of a self sealing O-ring for temperatures up to
225 °C or with FFKM O-ring for temperatures to
300 °C or with a flat PTFE flat gasket for temperatures to 350 °C, or with an FG Flexible Graphite
gasket for temperatures to 500 °C with the HP/HT
option (for fixed head versions only). A split ring
closure is standard.
All three volumes use the same Model 4921
Ceramic Fiber Heater.
These micro vessels can be easily converted
from one size to another by simply substituting a
larger or smaller cylinder and the corresponding
internal fittings. The support system can also
be readily adapted to accept any of the vessels
from the 4790 Series vessels. The opportunity to
modify these small reactors is restricted because
of the limited head space available.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
140
P arr
I n st ru m ent
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
8
Com pany
141
s
e
l
Series 4790 Micro Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number*
Approximate Sizes, mL
4791
4792
4793
4791HP/HT*
4792HP/HT*
4793HP/HT*
25
50
100
25
50
100
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
3000 psi (200 bar)
5000 psi (345 bar)
Maximum Temperature w/ Corresponding Gasket
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with FG Flexible Graphite,
Flat Gasket (HP/HT)
500 °C
Vessel
Vessel Style
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Bench Top
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Comprssion Bolts)
Valve Connections
1/8" NPT Male, 1/4" NPT Male for HP, 1/4" NPT Female for HP/HT
Pressure Gage, Size
3.5 inches
Range
0-3000 psi (200 bar), 0-5000 psi (345 bar) HP, HP/HT
Temperature Measurement
Fixed Thermocouple (Thermowell for special alloys)
Cooling (Optional)
Cold Finger
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
1.0
1.3
1.3
1.0
1.3
1.3
Inside Depth, inches
2.0
2.3
4.6
2.0
2.3
4.6
7
7
8
7
7
8
Approximate Weight of
Cylinder, pounds
Heater
Heater Style
Heater Power, Watts
Ceramic Fiber Heater
700
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Series 4790 Pressure Vessel Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
Materials of Construction
Gage Block Assemblies
Gaskets & Seals
Rupture Disc
Pressure Gage
Cooling Coil
4848 Reactor Controller
4871 Process Controller
9
10
165
118
116
117
121
96
101
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Heaters
External Valves and Fittings
Solids Charging Ports
Condensers
Electrical Glands
Catalyst Addition Device
Relief Valves
Windows
Explosion Proof Options
Sample Collection Device
108
123
120
115
128
120
117
127
125
122
Model 4791, 25 mL General Purpose Vessel
ACCESSORIES*
Liners
Pressure Hoses
Valves and Fittings
Liquid Pipettes
Gas Burettes
121
124
123
120
119
*May require modifications of vessel to install.
4793HP/HT, 100 mL Fixed Head Vessel
142
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4790 System Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 479_-T-SS-3000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4790 Series
Vessel System can be developed by combining individual symbols from the
separate sections below. For more information on how to use this ordering
guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
4791
25 mL
4792
50 mL
4793
100 mL
Head Style
VGR*
VGR*
VGR*
* Three Valves, Gage, Rupture Disc, & Thermocouple. HP/
HT versions include two valves.
B Head Options
-No Symbol
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
(3000 psi / 200 bar @ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel
(3000 psi / 200 bar @ 350 °C)
C High Temperature Option
-HP
5000 psi / 345 bar @ 350 °C
-HP/HT*
5000 psi / 345 bar @ 500 °C
*Fixed Head only
D Gasket
-OV
-OK
-T
-FG
/ Maximum Temperature
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 °C (HP/
HT option only)
E Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400*
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2/B-3*
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20*
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
*Maximum temperature and/or pressure limited.
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
F Heater
-H115
115V Heater: The appropriate heater will
be added to your system. Please see
Specification Guide for more information.
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will
be added to your system. Please see
Specification Guide for more information.
G Heater Stand Options
-NS
Heater only, no stand
-BTS
Bench Top Stand
H Pressure Gage
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
I
Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
J Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
K Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
L Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
143
Series 4760-4777 General Purpose Pressure Vessels: 100-600 mL
Series Number:
47604777
Type:
Mini
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Sizes, mL:
100-600
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
2000 (138)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
High Temperature (HT) /
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
500 w/ FG Flat Gasket
hese are the most popular of the
small general purpose vessels.
Parr offers a range of sizes large
enough to work with significant
sample sizes, yet small enough to be
handled with ease by all operators.
They are made in both fixed head
and moveable vessel styles and are
available with an FKM O-ring seal for
operating temperatures to 225 °C,
and FFKM O-ring for temperatures to
300 °C, or with a flat, PTFE gasket for
operating temperatures up to 350 °C
maximum.
Choosing the high temperature
option (HT) boosts the maximum
temperature to 500 °C, but de-rates
the MAWP to 2000 psi (138 bar).
Standard Mini vessels can be converted to high temperature vessels
(500 °C max temperature and 2000
psi MAWP) by chaing the head
assembly (contains cone connections,
high temperature valves, and grafoil
gasket) replacing the heater with a
ceramic fiber heater and replacing the
split ring. Contact Parr for details.
Although internal and external
space is limited on these small vessels, custom ports and fittings are
available. All vessels in this series can
also be easily converted from one
size to another by simply substituting
a longer or shorter cylinder with the
corresponding internal fittings and
heaters.
Clamp-on or mantle heaters are
available for the Series 4760-4777
moveable vessels. Stands with
heaters are offered for the fixed
head vessels.
The heaters furnished for nonstirred vessels are the same as those
furnished for the stirred versions of
the same size vessels. A full description of the different types of heaters
is found in our Heater Options section. Automatic temperature
controllers are available for most all
Parr non-stirred vessels.
Custom heaters are also available
for these vessels when it is necessary
to meet explosion proof requirements, to accommodate installed
windows or fittings, or to convert
to a welded jacket for steam or oil
heating.
T
Cross Section 4760
Cross Section 4760Q
4766 General Purpose Vessel VGR w/A850HC Support Stand, A2230 HC Heater,
and 4838 Controller.
4760 with plug and rupture disc
assembly installed.
144
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4760-4777 Pressure Vessel System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number*
4760
Approximate Sizes, mL
4761
4766
4762
300
4763
4767
4764
450
4765
4768
4772
4773
600
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
3000 psi (200 bar)
HT Max. Pressure (MAWP)
2000 psi (138 bar)
4774
4775
4776
160
100
NA
NA
4777
Maximum Temperature w/ Corresponding Gasket
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with Grafoil Gasket (HT)
500 °C
500 °C
500 °C
Vessel Style
Vessel Mounting
Moveable or Fixed Head
Maximum Head Openings
7 (Dependant on opening size, and required fittings)
Closure
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/8" NPT Male (1/8" NPT Female for HT Vessels)
Pressure Gage, Size
3.5 inches
Range, Standard Temp.
0-3000 psi (200 bar)
Range, High Temperature
0-2000 psi (137 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Fixed Thermocouple (Thermowell for special alloys)
Cooling Coil Style (optional)
Single Loop
Bottom Drain Valve
1/4" NPT (Not available on HT Models.)
Head Style
1/8" NPT w/Plug
•
“A” Socket
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc,
and Thermocouple)
•
•
•
•
•
Thermowell
•
•
•
•
•
Heaters
Heater Style
Heater Power, Watts
Heater Style w/ HT Option
Heater Power, Watts
Rigid Mantle
Rigid Mantle
Rigid Mantle
Clamp-on Band
Clamp-on Band
510
590
780
500
500
Ceramic Fiber
Ceramic Fiber
Ceramic Fiber
NA
NA
800
800
1100
NA
NA
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
10 / 5 (14 / 7 High Temperature)
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
Inside Depth, inches
4.0
6.0
8.0
2.0
2.0
Approximate Weight of
Cylinder, Pounds
9.0
10.0
11.0
7.0
2.0
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
145
Series 4760-4777 General Purpose Pressure Vessels
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
Materials of Construction
Gage Block Assemblies
Gaskets & Seals
Rupture Disc
Pressure Gage
Cooling Coil
4838 Temperature Controller
4871 Process Controller
9
10
165
118
116
117
121
99
101
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Heaters
External Valves and Fittings
Solids Charging Ports
Condensers
Electrical Glands
Catalyst Addition Device
Relief Valves
Windows
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
Sample Collection Device
108
123
120
115
128
120
117
127
125
122
4766 Vessels, 300 mL, Fixed Head, Quick-release Split Ring, and a 4848 Controller
shown with optional Expansion Modules.
ACCESSORIES*
Liners
Pressure Hoses
Valves and Fittings
Liquid Pipettes
Gas Filling Burettes
121
124
123
119
118
*May require modifications of vessel to install.
Model 4761, 300 mL Vessel
with A281HC Adapter and
A146VB Needle Valve.
146
Model 4766, VGR with PTFE Flat Gasket and
optional second valve.
Model 4768Q, with VGR, O-ring seal, and
optional second valve.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4760-4777 System Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 476_-T-SS-2000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4760 Series Vessel System can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information
on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
Openings
4760
300 mL
One Opening, 1/8" NPT w/plug
4761
300 mL
One “A” Socket
4766
300 mL
VGR**
4762
450 mL
One Opening, 1/8" NPT w/plug
4763
450 mL
One “A” Socket
4767
450 mL
VGR**
4764
600 mL
One Opening, 1/8" NPT w/plug
4765
600 mL
One “A” Socket
4768
600 mL
VGR**
4772*
160 mL
One Opening, 1/8" NPT w/plug
4773*
160 mL
One “A” Socket
4774*
160 mL
VGR**
4775*
100 mL
One Opening, 1/8" NPT w/plug
4776*
100 mL
One “A” Socket
4777*
100 mL
VGR**
* High temperature option not available.
** Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, & Thermocouple
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(3000 psi / 200 bar @ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel
C High Temperature Option
-HT
D Gasket
-OV
-OK
-T
-FG
High Temperature / 500 °C
(Vessel Heads Modified)
/ Maximum Temperature
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 °C
E Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400*
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2/B-3*
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20*
-TI2
Titanium Grade 2*
-TI4
Titanium Grade 4*
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702*
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705*
* High temperature option not available.
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
F Heater
-H115
115V Heater: The appropriate heater will
be added to your system. Please see
Specification Guide for more information.
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will
be added to your system. Please see
Specification Guide for more information.
G Heater Stand Options
-NS
Heater Only, No Stand
-BTS
Bench Top Stand
H Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
I Internal Cooling Coil
-CL
Internal Cooling Loop
J Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve Installed (Not Available on High
Temperature Vessels)
K Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
L Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
M Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
N Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
147
Series 4600-4620 1 & 2 Liter Pressure Vessel Systems
Series Number:
46004620
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, mL:
1000-2000
970-1900 HP
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
hese are the
largest of the Parr
Vessels that can be
handled on a bench
top.
These reactors
are available with an
FKM O-ring seal for
operating temperatures to 225 °C, and
FFKM O-ring for temperatures to 300 °C,
Cross Section 4605
or with a flat, PTFE
gasket for operating
temperatures up to
350 °C maximum.
An optional HP
(High Pressure)
flat gasket version
has been added for
maximum allowable
working pressure of
2900 psi (200 bar) at
350 °C. Both fixed
head and moveable
vessel designs are
4621 Cross Section
available. An optional
pneumatic lift is
available for the heavier 2 liter cylinder and heater.
It should be noted, however, that the 2 liter, fixed
head model is tall and may not be convenient
to operate on a standard height bench top. We
recommend using a floor stand.
With their larger diameter, these mid-size
reactors have sufficient space for special modifications, such as: an internal cooling coil, bottom
drain valve (not on 2 liter bench top), ball valve for
a solids charging port, catalyst addition devices,
condensers, electrical feed-throughs and more.
Details are provided in the Chapter 5 of this catalog, starting on page 101.
T
4621 Pressure Vessel with Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, and
Thermowell (VGR ) and second valve.
High Pressure (HP)
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
2900 (200)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C, at
High Pressure (HP):
350 @ 2900 psi
4605 with Rupture Disc Assembly.
148
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4600-4620 Pressure Vessel System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
4601
Model Number*
4611
4621
4602
4612
Approx. Sizes, mL
1000
2000
Approx. Sizes for HP Models, mL
970
1900
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
HP Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
2900 psi (200 bar)
4622
Maximum Temperature w/ Corresponding Gasket
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Bench Top
Standard Pressure Closure
Split-Ring (6 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
High Pressure Closure
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/8" Male NPT
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-3000 psi (200 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine
3/8" NPT
(1900 psi/350 °C) 1000 mL
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
NA
Head Style
Opening
1/8" NPT w/plug
Thermowell
No
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc,
Thermocouple w/ Thermowell)
No
1/8" NPT w/plug
Yes
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc,
Thermocouplel w/ Thermowell)
No
No
Yes
Heater (Calrod)
For Moveable Head: Model / Wattage
4914 / 1000
4913 / 1500
For Fixed Head: Model / Wattage
4941 / 1000
4942 / 1500
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
12 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
4.00
High Pressure Inside Diameter, inches
3.75
Inside Depth, inches
5.4
10.5
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
28
36
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
149
Series 4600-4620 Pressure Vessel Systems
INDEX TO OPTIONS
OPTIONS
PAGE
Certification
Materials of Construction
Gage Block Assemblies
Gaskets & Seals
Rupture Disc
Pressure Gage
Cooling Coil
4838 Temperature Controller
4871 Process Controller
9
10
165
118
116
117
121
99
101
CUSTOM OPTIONS
Heaters
External Valves and Fittings
Solids Charging Ports
Condensers
Electrical Glands
Catalyst Addition Device
Relief Valves
Windows
Equipment for Use in Potentially
Ignitable Atmospheres
Sample Collection Device
108
123
120
115
128
120
117
127
Model 4622, 2 Liter
Vessel, Moveable Head
125
122
ACCESSORIES*
Liners
Pressure Hoses
Valves and Fittings
Liquid Pipettes
Gas Filling Burettes
121
124
123
119
118
4622 2 Liter General Purpose Vessel with Model 4913 Heater.
*May require modifications of vessel to install.
150
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4600-4620 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 46__-T-SS-2000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4600-4620 Series Vessel can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more
information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
Vessel Style
4601
1000 mL
1/8” NPT w/Plug
4611
1000 mL
One “B” Socket
4621
1000 mL
VGR*
4602
2000 mL
1/8” NPT w/Plug
4612
2000 mL
One “B” Socket
4622
2000 mL
VGR*
*VGR = Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, Thermowell with Thermocouple
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(1900 psi / 131 bar @ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (1900 psi / 131 bar @ 350 °C)
C High Pressure Option
-HP
2900 psi / 200 bar @ 350 °C
D Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 °C
E Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
I Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data logging
-4848
with Software. For use with up to three additional display
modules.
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data logging
with Software. For use with one additional display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
-4838
J Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
K Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
L Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
F Heaters
-H115
115V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added to
your system. Please see Specification Guide for more
information.
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added to
your system. Please see Specification Guide for more
information.
G Heater Stand Options
-BTS
Bench Top Stand
-FC
Floor Cart, Moveable Head
-FS
Floor Stand
-FSP
Floor Stand, w/ Pneumatic Lift
H Pressure Gage
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
151
Series 4605-4626 600-1200 mL High Pressure Vessel Systems
Series Number:
his series of vessels has been designed for users who need
higher operating pressures than the 2000 to 3000 psi offered by
the General Purpose Reactors, but do not require the high operating temperatures provided by the Series 4650 High Pressure, High
Temperature Reactors. These reactors offer working pressures to 5000
psi (345 bar) at temperatures to 350 °C.
These vessels have been designed with outside dimensions comparable to the Series 4600 so that they can use the same support system
and heater as these popular general purpose models. This provides not
only an attractively priced high pressure/moderate temperature system,
but also reactors that can be interchanged with the 1 and 2 liter sizes.
The thicker walls required for higher operating pressures reduce the
volumes of these reactors to 600 and 1200 mL.
These vessels can be used in either the bench top, floor stand, or
moveable cart mountings. While the 1200 mL reactor is offered as a
fixed head bench top model, it is too tall and too heavy to be handled
comfortably on a standard height bench top. It is recommended that a
floor stand support option should be selected unless the user has an
adjustable bench top which will accommodate the overall height of the
1200 mL systems.
T
46054626
Type:
High Pressure
Cross Section 4605
Stand:
Floor Stand or
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Series 4605-4626 Pressure Vessel System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model No. - Moveable Vessel
4605
Approximate Sizes, mL
Vessel Sizes, mL:
600 and 1200
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
High Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
Vessel Style
4615
4625
4606*
4616*
600
4626
1200
5000 psi (345 bar)
Maximum Temperature
with PTFE Flat Gasket
5000 (345)
350 °C
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Bench Top, Floor Stand, or Moveable Cart (Moveable Head Only)
Closure
Split-Ring (8 Compression Bolts)
Valve Connections
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
1/4" Male NPT
Pressure Gage, Size
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
4.5 inches
Range
0 - 5000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine or Loop
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
1" NPS (Floor Stand or Moveable Cart Only)
Heater (Calrod)
Heater Power, Watts
1000
1500
Head Style
1/8” NPT
w/plug
Opening
Thermowell
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture
Disc, and Thermocouple)
—
—
Yes
Inside Depth, inches
4.7
9.8
Approximate Weight of
Cylinder, pounds
51
57
1/8” NPT
w/plug
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture
Disc, and Thermocouple)
—
—
Yes
4.7
9.8
4.7
9.8
51
57
51
57
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
3.25
* Fixed Head Style Only.
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
152
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4605-4626 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 476_-T-SS-2000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4605 Series Vessel
can be developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below.
For more information on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
Vessel Style
4605
600 mL
One Opening, Size TBA
4615
600 mL
One “B” Socket
4625
600 mL
VGR*
4606
1200 mL
One Opening, Size TBA
4616
1200 mL
One “B” Socket
4626
1200 mL
VGR*
* Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, Thermocouple
J Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(5000 psi / 345 bar @ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel
K Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Heaters
-H115
115V Heater: The appropriate heater will be
added to your system. Please see Specification
Guide for more information.
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be
added to your system. Please see Specification
Guide for more information.
F Heater
-BTS
-FC
-FS
-FSP
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
L Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
M Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
Stand Options
Bench Top Stand
Floor Cart, Moveable Head
Floor Stand
Floor Stand, w/ Pneumatic Lift
G Pressure Gage
-10000
10000 psi / 690 bar
-7500
7500 psi / 517 bar
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
H Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
I Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve, 1” NPS
Model 4625, 600 mL Vessel
Model 4625, 600 mL Vessel with
4913 Heater
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
153
Series
Series 4650
xxxx Pressure
High Pressure
Vessels
/ High Temperature Vessel Systems
Series Number:
he 4650 Series High Pressure and
High Temperature Vessels are
available in volumes of 250, 500, and
1000 mL. These vessels can obtain temperatures up to 600 °C and a maximum
pressure of 6000 psi (410 bar). The maximum pressure at maximum temperature
is 4200 psi (290 bar) at 600 °C. They
come standard with a Split Ring Closure
with 8 Compression bolts, and a VGR
head design that includes Valve, Gage,
Rupture Disc, and Thermowell. An additional valve with dip tube can be added.
The maximum allowable head openings are seven but this may be limited
by the types of fittings required. These
vessels are available as either a movable
or fixed head design.
T
4650
Type:
High Pressure
High Temperature
Stand:
Bench Top
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
4652 Cross Section
Model 4651, 250 mL Vessel with VGR and
Thermocouple.
Series 4650 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Vessel Sizes, mL:
250-1000
Model Number
4651
Sizes, mL
High Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
4200 (290)
250
4652
4653
500
1000
6000 psi (410 bar) @ 350 °C
5000 psi (345 bar) @ 500 °C
4200 psi (290 bar) @ 600 °C
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
Maximum Temperature
PTFE Flat Gasket: 350 °C or Grafoil Gasket: 500-600 °C
Vessel Style
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
500 w/ Grafoil Gasket
Vessel Mounting
Moveable or Fixed Head
Maximum Head Openings
7 (Dependant on opening size, and required fittings)
Closure
Split-Ring (8 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket)
Valve Connections
High Temperature (HT)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
600 w/ Grafoil Gasket
1/4” NPT Female
Pressure Gage, Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-5000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil Style (Optional)
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
Single Loop
N/A
N/A
1” NPS
Head Style
Openings
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, Thermowell w/ Thermocouple)
Options
Optional Valve and Dip Tube available
Heaters
Heater Style
Ceramic
Heater Power, Watts
1500
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
115 or 230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
15 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
Inside Depth, inches
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
2.5
3.25
6.63
13.13
30
36
48
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
154
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4650 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 465_-FG-SS-5000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4650 Series Vessel can be developed
by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information on how to
use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No.
Size
Vessel Style
4651
250 mL
VGR*
4652
500 mL
VGR*
4653
1000 mL
VGR*
* Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc, Thermowell w/ Thermocouple
B Head Options
-No Symbol Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (Not available on 4653)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 - 600 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
I Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
J Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
K Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
E Heaters
-H115
115V Heater: The appropriate heater will be
added to your system. Please see Specification
Guide for more information.
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be
added to your system. Please see Specification
Guide for more information.
F Heater Stand Options
-BTS
Bench Top Stand
G Pressure Gage
-7500
7500 psi / 517 bar
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
H Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
4652 Vessel with 4923 Heater.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
155
Series 4660 1 & 2 Gallon Pressure Vessel Systems
T
he 4660 Vessels extend the range
to 1 and 2 gallon (3.75 and 7.9
liter) sizes.
These vessels are available with
an FKM O-ring seal for operating
temperatures to 225 °C, and FFKM
O-ring for temperatures to 300 °C, or
with a flat, PTFE gasket for operating
temperatures up to 350 °C maximum.
Both fixed head and moveable
head designs are available. The
moveable head vessels are designed
so that they can be opened or closed
conveniently without removing the
cylinder from the heater and without
auxiliary handling equipment. The
split-ring cover clamp sections can
be moved into place from the sides,
and the compression bolts can be
tightened with the vessel in place in
Series Number:
4660
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Floor Stand
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
its heater. The fixed head versions
allow the head (and the connections
made to it) to remain in place while
the cylinder and heater are lowered
with the aid of the included pneumatic lift system.
An optional bottom drain valve
may be added for convenient product recovery. As with the smaller
floor stand models, these larger, selfcontained systems can be equipped
with a variety of attachments, such
as: condensers, solids charging port,
bottom drain, special heaters, jacketed vessels and automatic valves
and regulators. Because of the higher
wattage heaters for these reactors,
all models in this series require a 230
volt power supply.
4661-4666 Cross Section
4661Q-4666Q Cross Section
Series 4660 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Vessel Sizes,
Gallons (Liters):
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
1 (3.75) and 2 (7.99)
Model Number
4661
Approximate Sizes, Gallon (Liter)
4662
1900 (131)
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
1900 psi (130 bar)
Maximum Temperature with Corresponding Gaskets
with FKM O-Ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-Ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Floor Stand
Maximum Head Openings
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
4666
2 (7.99)
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
4665
1 (3.75)
Closure
10 (Dependant on opening size, and required fittings)
Split-Ring (10 Compression Bolts for Flat Gasket, no Compression Bolts for O-ring)
Valve Connections
1/4” NPT Female
Pressure Gage Size / Range
4.5 inches / 0-2000 psi (140 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil Style (Optional)
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
3/8" NPT
Head Style
Opening
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
Heater
Heater Style
Calrod
Heater Power, Watts
2250
2750
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
13 / 15
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
6.0
Inside Depth, inches
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
8.5
75
17.1
80
85
90
* VGR = Valve, Gage, & Rupture Disc, Thermowell w/ Thermocouple
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
156
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4660 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 466_-T-SS-2000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4660 Series Vessel can be developed
by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information on how to
use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4661
1 Gallon
4662
1 Gallon
4665
2 Gallon
4666
2 Gallon
Vessel Style
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Rupture Disc, Gage,
& Thermowell
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Rupture Disc, Gage,
& Thermowell
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(1900 psi / 130 bar @ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (1900 psi / 130 bar @ 350 °C)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Heaters
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added
to your system. Please see Specification Guide for
more information.
F Heater Stand Options
-FC
Floor Cart, Moveable Head
-FSP
Floor Stand, w/Pneumatic
J Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
K Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
L Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
M Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
G Pressure Gage
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
H Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
I Bottom Drain Valve
-BDV
Bottom Drain Valve, 3/8” NPT
Model 4662, 1 Gallon Vessel, in 4928 Heater with
4848 Process Controller.
Model 4666, 2 Gallon Vessel, Fixed
Head Floor Stand, with a Welded
Jacket and Pneumatic Lift.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
157
Series 4680 High Pressure /High Temp. Vessels: 1 & 1.8 Liters
Series Number:
he Series 4680 High Pressure/High
Temperature Vessels are available in either
a 1.0 L or 1.8 L capacity. The maximum
temperature for these vessels is 600 °C and at that
temperature can be run at a maximum pressure of
4200 psi (290 bar). Or, run these vessels at 350 °C
and obtain a maximum pressure of 6000 psi (410
bar). A Split Ring closure with 12 Compression
Bolts secures the head which allows a maximum
of 8 openings. The Series 4680 Vessels can be configured with either a fixed head on a floor stand
or as a moveable head vessel on a moveable cart.
An optional pneumatic lift is available on the floor
stand model.
T
4680
Type:
High Pressure,
High Temperature
Stand:
Cart or Floor Stand
Cross Section 4680-4683
4683 Fixed Head, 1.8 L Vessel
shown with Split Rings open
and vessel down using a
pneumatic lift.
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Series 4680 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
4680
4681
Approximate Sizes, mL
Vessel Sizes, Liters:
1 and 1.8
6000 (290)
1800
5000 psi (345 bar) @ 500 °C
6000 psi (410 bar) @ 350 °C
4200 psi (290 bar) @ 600 °C
Maximum Temperature with Corresponding Gaskets
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket
600 °C
Vessel Style
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
600 w/ Flat FG Gasket
4683
1000
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
4682
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Cart or Floor Stand
Maximum Head Openings
8 (Dependant on opening size, and required fittings)
Closure
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts)
Valve Connections
1/4” NPT Female
Pressure Gage Size
4.5 inches
Range
0-5000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil Style (Optional)
Bottom Drain Valve (optional)
Single Loop
N/A
N/A
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
1” NPS
Head Style
Opening
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
Heater
Heater Style
Ceramic Fiber
Heater Power, Watts
2300
2500
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
Inside Depth, inches
3.75
6.12
10.5
80
90
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
* VGR = Valve, Gage, & Rupture Disc, Thermowell w/ Thermocouple
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
158
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4680 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 476_-FG-SS-5000 A composite identification
number to be used when ordering a 4680 Series Vessel can be developed by combining
individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information on how to
use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4680
1000 mL
4681
1000 mL
4682
1800 mL
4683
1800 mL
Vessel Style
One Opening, Size TBA
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc,
Thermowell w/ Thermocouple)
One Opening, Size TBA
VGR (Valve, Gage, Rupture Disc,
Thermowell w/ Thermocouple)
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(5000 psi / 345 bar @ 500 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (5000 psi / 345 bar @ 500 °C)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
I Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
J Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
K Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
E Heaters
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added
to your system. Please see Specification Guide for
more information.
F Heater Stand Options
-FC
Floor Cart, Moveable Head
-FSP
Floor Stand, w/Pneumatic
G Pressure Gage
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
H Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and
-4848
Data logging with Software. For use with up to
three additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and
Data logging with Software. For use with one
additional display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
4683 1.8 L High Pressure Vessel in
4932 Floor Stand Heater Assembly
4683 Fixed Head, 1.8 L Vessel,
double valve w/ dip tube, gas
release valve, gage, rupture disc,
and thermowell.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
159
Series 4670 High Pressure/High Temp. Vessels: 1 & 1.5 Gallon
Series Number:
he Series 4670 High Pressure/High
Temperature Vessels are available
in either a 1.0 or 1.5 Gallon capacity.
The maximum pressure for these vessels
is 3000 psi (200 bar). The maximum temperature for these vessels is 600 °C and at
that temperature can be run at a maximum
pressure of 2200 psi (150 bar). A Split Ring
closure with 16 Compression bolts secures
the head which allows a maximum of 12
openings. The Series 4670 Vessels can be
configured with either a fixed head on a
floor stand or as a moveable head vessel
on a moveable cart. An optional pneumatic
lift is available on the floor stand model.
T
4670
Type:
High Pressure,
High Temperature
Stand:
Cart or Floor Stand
Cross Section 4671-4674
Model 4674, 5800 mL Vessel in 4934
Heater, with 4848 Controller on
Moveable Floor Stand.
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Series 4670 Pressure Vessel Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
Model Number
Vessel Sizes, Gallon (Liter):
1 (3.75), 1.5 (5.8)
4671
Sizes, Gallons (Liters)
4672
4673
1 (3.75)
4674
1.5 (5.8)
3000 psi (200 bar) @ 500 °C
2200 psi (150 bar) @ 600 °C
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
Maximum Temperature with Corresponding Gaskets
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
3000 (200)
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
with Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket
500-600 °C
Vessel Style
Moveable or Fixed Head
Vessel Mounting
Standard Maximum
Operating Temp., °C:
600 w/ Flat FG Gasket
Cart or Floor Stand
Maximum Head Openings
12 (Dependant on opening size, and required fittings)
Closure
Split-Ring (16 Compression Bolts)
Valve Connections
1/4” NPT Female
Pressure Gage Size
4.5 inches
Range
0 - 5000 psi (345 bar)
Temperature Measurement
Thermowell
Cooling Coil Style (Optional)
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (optional)
1” NPS
Head Style
Opening
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
Rupture Disc Only
VGR*
Heater
Heater Style
Ceramic Fiber
Heater Power, Watts
2800
Electrical Supply
Volts, AC
230
Maximum Load, amps, 115 / 230
15 / 9
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
5.5
Inside Depth, inches
9.75
15.0
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
100
120
* VGR = Valve, Gage, & Rupture Disc, Thermowell w/ Thermocouple
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
160
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4670 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 467_-FG-SS-5000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4670 Series Vessel can be developed
by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information on how to
use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4671
3750 mL
4672
3750 mL
4673
5800 mL
4674
5800 mL
Vessel Style
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Gage, Rupture Disc,
& Thermowell
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Gage, Rupture Disc,
& Thermowell
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head
-No Symbol
(3000 psi / 200 bar @ 500 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (3000 psi / 200 bar @ 500 °C)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
-FG
Flexible Graphite, Flat Gasket / 500 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Heaters
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added
to your system. Please see Specification Guide for
more information.
F Heater Stand Options
-FC
Floor Cart, Moveable Head
-FSP
Floor Stand, w/Pneumatic
J Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
-4848
logging with Software. For use with up to three
additional display modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data
logging with Software. For use with one additional
display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
K Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
L Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
M Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
G Pressure Gage
-5000
5000 psi / 345 bar
-3000
3000 psi / 200 bar
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
H Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
I
Bottom Drain Valve
Bottom Drain Valve, 1” NPS
-BDV
(Floor stand supports only)
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
161
Series 4676 - 4679 General Purpose Vessels: 2.6 & 5 Gallons
Series Number:
46764679
Type:
General Purpose
Stand:
Floor Stand
Vessel Mounting:
Moveable or
Fixed Head
Vessel Sizes, Liters:
10 and 20
Standard Pressure
MAWP Rating, psi (bar):
1900 (131)
Maximum Operating
Temperature, °C:
225 w/ FKM O-ring
300 w/ FFKM O-ring
350 w/ PTFE Flat Gasket
he Series 4676-79 Vessels are the
largest vessels offered by Parr
Instrument Company. Vessel styles
are offered in a moveable head or
fixed head design.
These vessels are available with
an FKM O-ring seal for operating
temperatures to 225 °C, and FFKM
O-ring for temperatures to 300 °C,
or with a flat, PTFE gasket for
operating temperatures up to
350 °C maximum.
In the moveable head design, the
vessel is held in a support system
which minimizes the physical effort
required to handle these heavy
components. The hoist is attached
to a support column which provides
a convenient means for lifting the
head and cylinder out of the stand.
These components may be transferred to the holding position on
the right side of the stand. Vessels
equipped with a bottom drain valve
will probably remain in the heater
most of the time, but can be lifted
out when necessary.
The fixed head support stand features hinged split-rings that swing
to either side allowing the head to
remain fixed to the stand while a
pneumatic lift allows the cylinder
to be raised and lowered. When
lowered, the cylinder can be slid
forward for cleaning and servicing.
These vessels are generally used
for pilot plant or for custom chemical production purposes, usually
with a variety of attachments added
to the basic units.
T
Cross Section 4676-4679
Model 4679 General Purpose 10 Liter Vessel
Modified versions of these units
are available with higher working
pressures and temperatures.
Model 4677, 18.5 L
Vessel with heater,
and 4838 Temperature
Controller.
162
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Series 4676-4679 Pressure Vessel System Specifications
Shaded bar indicates specifications that change within series.
4676
Model Number
Approximate Sizes, Gallon (Liter)
4677
4678
5 (18.75)
4679
2.6 (10)
Maximum Pressure (MAWP)
1900 psi (131 bar)
Maximum Temperature w/ Corresponding Gasket
with FKM O-ring
225 °C
with FFKM O-ring
300 °C
with PTFE Flat Gasket
350 °C
Vessel Style
Floor Stand or Fixed Head Stand with Pneumatic Lift
Reactor Mounting
Moveable or Fixed Head
Closure
Split-Ring (12 Compression Bolts)
Pressure Gage, Size
Split-Ring (10 Compression Bolts)
4.5 inches
Range
0-2000 psi (140 bar)
Cooling Coil (Optional)
Serpentine
Bottom Drain Valve (Optional)
1.0" NPT
Head Style
Opening
1/4” or 3/8” NPT w/plug
2 Valves, Gage, and Rupture Disc
No
Yes
Thermowell
Heaters
Flexible Mantle Heater ô 200 °C or Band Heater/Ceramic > 200 °C
Heater Style
Heater Power, Watts
2500 (Moveable), 6000 (Fixed Head)
2500 (Moveable), 3600 (Fixed Head)
Cylinder Dimensions
Inside Diameter, inches
Inside Depth, inches
Approximate Weight of Cylinder, pounds
9.5
7.75
9.5
7.75
16.25
12.2
16.25
12.2
375
250
375
250
Other options available. See Ordering Guide, visit www.parrinst.com, or call for more information.
Please contact the Parr Technical Service Department to obtain complete system dimensions.
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
163
Series 4676-4679 Ordering Guide
The Order No. for the Base System is: 467_-T-SS-2000
A composite identification number to be used when ordering a 4676-4679 Series Vessels can be
developed by combining individual symbols from the separate sections below. For more information
on how to use this ordering guide, please see page 27.
A Base Model
Model No. Size
4676
18.75 L
4677
10 L
4678
18.75 L
4679
10 L
Vessel Style
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Gage, Rupture Disc, &
Thermowell
One Opening, Size TBA
Two Valves, Gage, Rupture Disc, &
Thermowell
B Head Options
Standard Configuration, Moveable Head (1900 psi / 131 bar
-No Symbol
@ 350 °C)
-FH
Fixed Head Vessel (1900 psi / 131 bar @ 350 °C)
C Gasket / Maximum Temperature
-OV
FKM O-ring / 225 °C
-OK
FFKM O-ring / 300 °C
-T
PTFE Flat Gasket / 350 °C
D Vessel Material of Construction
-SS
T316 Stainless Steel
-MO
Alloy 400
-IN
Alloy 600
-HB
Alloy B-2 / B-3
-HC
Alloy C-276
-CS
Alloy 20
-T12
Alloy C-276
-TI4
Titanium Grade 2
-ZR702
Zirconium Grade 702
-ZR705
Zirconium Grade 705
See page 11 for complete list of available alloys.
E Electrical Supply*
-230
230VAC, Single Phase
-400
400-415V 3-Phase "Y"
F Heater
-H230
230V Heater: The appropriate heater will be added to your
system. Please see Specification Guide for more information.
G Heater Stand Options
-FS
Floor Stand (Table support w/ manual lift)
-FSP
Floor Stand, w/Pneumatic
H Pressure Gage
-2000
2000 psi / 137 bar
-1000
1000 psi / 70 bar
-600
600 psi / 40 bar
-200
200 psi / 14 bar
-100
100 psi / 7 bar
I Internal Cooling Coil
-SC
Serpentine Coil
J Bottom Drain Valve
Bottom Drain Valve, 1” NPS
-BDV
(Floor stand supports only)
164
K Head Lift Mechanism (Table Support Only)
-EH
Electric Hoist (115 VAC)
L Controller
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data logging
-4848
with Software. For use with up to three additional display
modules.
-4838
PID Control, Ramp & Soak Programming, and Data logging
with Software. For use with one additional display module.
-4871
Process Controller (for enhanced control options)
See Chapter 6 for a complete list of controllers and options.
M Controller Options
-PDM
Pressure Display Module
-HTM
High Temperature Cut Off Module
-ETLM
External Temperature Limit Module
-SVM
Solenoid Valve Module (for cooling control)
RS-485 to USB Cable for 4848 Controller
-A1925E4
(required for data logging)
-A1925E6
RS-485 to USB Converter, isolated, 30-ft
-A3504HC
SpecView Software Package
N Custom Options (List All Desired)
-VD
Extra Head Port w/Valve & Dip Tube
-DVD
Double Valve Assembly & Dip Tube
-CAD
Internal Catalyst Addition Device
-XCAD
External Catalyst Addition Device
-SCP
Solids Charging Port (Ball Valve)
-RC
Reflux Condenser
-RTC
Reflux/Take-Off Condenser
-WJ
Welded Jacket
See Chapter 7 for a complete list of optional accessories.
O Certifications
-ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
-PED
PED Certification
-CH
China Certification
-P
Parr Certification
Please note that all options and combinations
are not compatible with all models.
* Because of considerable power requirements for a unit this
size, 3-phase power is typical. Single phase 230 VAC is also
possible, but requires a power source capable of supplying
over 40 amps, well beyond the limits of most laboratory
power supplies.
Users are advised to have a qualified electrician install a
suitable 3-phase “Y” power supply. Parr Technical Support
will be happy to assist with electrical specifications.
Systems with lower electrical requirements such as jacketed
systems or lower wattage mantle heaters may be able to use
single phase effectively.
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
N
o
n
-
S
t
i
r
r
e
d
P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
V
e
s
s
e
l
s
8
Gage Block Assemblies
arr gage block assemblies
combine the function of an:
• Inlet / Outlet Valve
• Pressure Gage
• Safety Rupture Disc
P
into a compact assembly which
can be attached to the head of
any small vessel with limited
head space using a connecting tube. There is a threaded
socket in the block for a gas
connection with a pressure
hose or tubing using a type
“A” coned pressure fitting.
Coned fittings are also used
on the thick-walled tube which
connects the block to the pressure vessel. The valve in this
assembly controls the gas flow
into the vessel and the gage
shows the pressure in the vessel when the valve is closed.
A rupture disc with a burst
rating matched to the gage is
installed in the block.
For small vessels with a
1-inch I.D. that can only accommodate a singe head port, we
offer a version of the 4316 with
a 1/16" O.D. thermocouple.
Two Sizes
These gage block assemblies are made in two styles
which differ only in the size of
the pressure gage and the size
of the tube connection to the
pressure vessel. The smaller
4316 Gage Block Assembly is
usually furnished with a 3-1/2
inch diameter pressure gage
and includes a 3-inch long
connecting tube with type “A”
coned fitting. This assembly is
normally installed on pressure
vessels up to 600 mL.
The 4317 Gage Block Assembly has a 4-1/2 inch diameter
gage and type “B” coned fitting
on a 3-inch long connecting
tube. This assembly is normally
installed on vessels of 1000 mL
and larger.
The gage block, connecting
tube and pressure gage on
all of these assemblies are
normally made of type 316
Stainless Steel, but they can
also be made of Alloy 400 on
special order. Longer tubes can
be furnished on special order.
4317 Gage
Block
Assembly
4316 Gage
Block
Assembly
Available Gages
Any of the gages shown in this table can be
installed on these gage block assemblies.
Gages for Parr Pressure Vessels
Pressure Range
4-1/2" Diameter
3-1/2" Diameter
psi
bar
Gage Number
Gage Number
0-100
0-7
56HCPA
593HCP1AD
0-200
0-14
56HCPB
593HCP2AD
0-600
0-40
56HCPC
593HCP6AD
0-1000
0-70
56HCPD
593HCPD
0-2000
0-140
56HCPF
593HCPF
0-3000
0-210
56HCPG
593HCPG
Ordering Information
0-5000
0-350
56HCPH
593HCP50AD
Part No.
Description
0-7500
0-517
56HCP75AD
NA
4316
with Type “A” Connector
0-10000
0-700
56HCPK
NA
4317
with Type “B” Connector
When ordering, specify the catalog number, pressure gage
diameter, range, and if a thermocouple is required.
Coned Pressure Fittings
age Blocks, pressure
hoses and other parts that
are frequently removed from
a pressure vessel are attached
with a coned, socket type
connector. The male segment
of a coned fitting consists of a
sleeve with a left-hand thread
screwed onto a thick-walled
tube, plus a compression nut
to complete the assembly.
When screwed into a mating
socket these parts produce a
rigid joint which will remain
tight over a wide temperature
and pressure range, yet the
G
joint can be made and broken
repeatedly without destroying
the sealing faces. No gasket
or sealing tape is required.
These fittings have the added
advantage of behaving like
union fitting, allowing the gage
block, connecting tube or hose
to remain stationary while the
nut is tightened.
Parr coned pressure fittings
are made in two sizes, identified as types “A” and “B”, for
1/4 inch and 3/8 inch tubing,
respectively.
Tubing
Nut
Sleeve
D
E
Coned Pressure Fittings
Type
A
B
Tube Size
1/4"
3/8"
Thread (D)
9/16 -18
3/4 -16
Bore (E)
3/32"
1/8"
Nut No.
35HC
326HC
Sleeve No.
40HC
366HC
1 - 8 0 0 - 8 7 2 - 7 7 2 0
Parr
Instrum ent
Company
165
Notes Series xxxx Pressure Vessels
166
w w w . p a r r i n s t . c o m
P arr
I n st ru ment
Company
Bulletin 4500 PDF v14.0
211 53rd Street
Moline, Illinois 61265 USA
Phone: 1-309-762-7716 or 1-800-872-7720
Fax: 1-309-762-9453
E-mail: parr@parrinst.com
Web: www.parrinst.com
Download PDF
Similar pages